Fluke Musical Instrument PM3370B User Manual

$XWRUDQJLQJ

&RPEL6FRSH

,QVWUXPHQW

30ꢀꢀꢁꢂ%ꢃ30ꢀꢀꢄꢂ%ꢃ30ꢀꢀꢅꢂ%

30ꢀꢀꢄꢆ%ꢃ30ꢀꢀꢅꢆ%

Users Manual

2/1- Nov-1998

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

III

Thank you for purchasing this FLUKE oscilloscope. It has been designed and

manufactured to the highest quality standards to give you many years of trouble

free and accurate measurements.

The powerful measuring functions listed below have been combined with an easy

and logical operation to let you use the full power of this instrument each and

every day.

If you have any comments on how this product could be improved, please contact

your local FLUKE organization. FLUKE addresses are listed in the back of the

REFERENCE MANUAL.

The REFERENCE MANUAL also contains:

CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

BRIEF CHECKING PROCEDURE

PERFORMANCE TEST PROCEDURES

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAIN FEATURES

There are five models in this family of FLUKE oscilloscopes. Each of these

models is a combination of an analog real-time oscilloscope and a fully featured

digital storage oscilloscope. By pressing a single key, you can switch the

instrument from the analog mode to the digital mode and back. This allows each

of the units to be used in an optimum operating mode for all kinds of signal

conditions. Complex data streams, modulated waveforms, and video signals can

often best be seen in the analog mode of operation. The digital mode of operation

is more suited for single events, signals with low repetition frequencies, and when

automatic measurements need to be performed.

In this family there is a choice of five models. Two models have a bandwidth of

200 MHz, two have a bandwidth of 100 MHz and one has a bandwidth of 60 MHz.

Beside the 2 channel models with EXT TRIG input, there is a choice of two models

with four fully featured channels, all shown in the following table:

Type Number

Bandwidth

Sample rate

Number of

Channels

Input

Impedance

PM3370B

PM3380B

PM3384B

PM3390B

PM3394B

60 MHz

200 MS/s

1 MΩ

100 MHz

200 MHz

1 MΩ

1 MΩ/50Ω

In the same instrument family, there are two 200-MHz and two 100-MHz analog

oscilloscopes that have specifications similar to the above-mentioned analog/

digital combination oscilloscopes operating in analog mode.

All analog/digital combination oscilloscopes listed above have the following features:

Autoranging attenuators.

Realtime clock.

32K sample acquisition memory in 4 channel versions.

8K sample acquisition memory, expandable to 32K in 2 channel versions.

Up to 40 waveforms stored in memory or 204 waveforms with optional

memory extension.

Autoset function for an instant optimized signal display at the touch of a button.

Autoranging timebase.

Cursor measurements with 1% accuracies.

Extensive set of fully automated voltmeter and time measurement functions.

Probe operated ’Touch Hold and Measure’ function freezes the display and

instantly displays the signal frequency, amplitude and dc voltage level.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Peak detection for the capture of glitches as narrow as 5 ns.

Pattern, State and Glitch triggering (2 ns) (2 channel models; 4ns Glitch

triggering only)

Event delay and pretriggering and posttriggering.

TV triggering including HDTV and TV line selection.

Serial interface for printing and plotting.

Averaging to reduce signal noise and to increase the vertical resolution from

8 to 16 bits.

Advanced mathematics, including digital low-pass filtering. A Math+ option

adds integration, differentiation, histogramming, and FFT.

Sine interpolation and magnification which enables true to life four channel

single shot acquisitions with a timebase up to 625 ns/div (32x magnified)

A delayed timebase with full trigger features.

An RS-232 (EIA-232-D) interface (standard) and an GPIB/IEEE-488 interface

(optional).

Autocal for automatic fine tuning of all circuitry to achieve maximum accuracy

under all user conditions.

Closed case calibration for efficient maintenance of traceable calibration at

minimum cost.

The following options are available:

A MATH+ option with more automated measurement functions including

envelope and measurement pass/fail testing. Also included in this option are

Integration, Differentiation, Histogramming, and FFT.

Memory extension offering 32K acquisition length and the ability to store 156

traces (of 512 samples each) in memory for 2 channel versions.

IEEE-488.2 interface using the new SCPI (Standard Commands for

Programmable Instruments) industry standard for remote control of test and

measurement equipment.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INITIAL INSPECTION

Check the contents of the shipment for completeness and note whether any

damage has occurred during transport. When the contents are incomplete or

there is damage, file a claim with the carrier immediately. Then notify the FLUKE

Sales or Service organization to arrange for the repair or replacement of the

instrument or other parts. FLUKE addresses are listed in the back of the

REFERENCE MANUAL.

The following parts should be included in the shipment:

Service ordering number

or model number

Oscilloscope

PM3370B, PM3380B or

PM3390B, PM3384B or

PM3394B

Front cover

5322 447 70121

Users Manual

Reference Manual

Line cord (European type) or

Line cord (North American type) or

Line cord (British type) or

Line cord (Swiss type) or

Line cord (Australian type)

Probes 10:1

5322 321 21616

5322 321 10446

5322 321 21617

5322 321 21618

5322 321 21781

Batteries

AA (LR6)

Spare fuse 3.15 AT

4822 070 33152

(located inside fuse holder)

The performance of the instrument can be tested by using the PERFORMANCE

TESTS in the REFERENCE MANUAL.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VII

INSIDE THIS MANUAL

This operating guide contains information on all of the oscilloscope’s features. It

starts with a general introduction, a summary of main capabilities, initial

inspection note and a front and rear view.

Operators safety

Installation instructions

Getting started

Chapter 1 should be read before unpacking,

installing, and operating the instrument.

Chapter 2 describes grounding, line cord, fuses,

and backup batteries.

Chapter 3 provides a 10-minute tutorial intended

for those who are not familiar with Fluke

oscilloscopes.

How to use more advanced

functions of the instrument

Chapter 4 provides the more experienced user

with a detailed explanation of the major functions

of the oscilloscope.

Function reference

Chapter 5 contains an alphabetized description of

each function. Each description includes an

explanation of local and remote control functions.

CPL protocol

Function index

Index

Chapter 6 provides the CPL commands with an

example of each.

The Function Index lists all implemented

functions in alphabetical order.

The overall index contains all function names

and reference words in alphabetical order. It

includes the relevant chapter and page number

where more detailed information can be found.

IN THE APPENDICES

Menu structures

RS-232

Cable configurations

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VIII

CONTENTS

Page

CONTENTS

1 OPERATORS SAFETY ^{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1}

1.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3 CAUTION AND WARNING STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.4 SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.5 IMPAIRED SAFETY PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.6 MEASURING EARTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ^{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1}

2.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1.1

2.1.2

Protective earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Mains voltage cord, mains voltage range and fuses . . . . . 2-1

2.2 MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.2.1

2.2.2

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Installation of batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.3 THE FRONT COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.4 HANDLE ADJUSTMENT AND OPERATING

POSITIONS OF THE INSTRUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.5 IEEE 488.2/IEC 625 BUS INTERFACE OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.6 RS-232-C SERIAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.7 RACK MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.8 VERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONTENTS

3 GETTING STARTED ^{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1}

3.1 FRONT-PANEL LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2 SWITCHING ON THE INSTRUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3.3 SCREEN CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.4 AUTO SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.5 MODE SWITCHING BETWEEN ANALOG AND

DIGITAL OPERATING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

3.6 VERTICAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

3.7 TIMEBASE SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

3.8 MAGNIFY (EXPAND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

3.9 DIRECT TRIGGER SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

3.10 PRE-TRIGGER VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

3.11 MORE ADVANCED FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

3.12 CURSOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

3.13 MORE ADVANCED TRIGGER FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

3.14 MORE SIGNAL DETAIL WITH THE DELAYED TIMEBASE . . . . 3-20

3.15 TRACE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

4 HOW TO USE MORE ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

OF THE INSTRUMENT ^{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1}

4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2 DISPLAY AND PROBE ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4.3 ANALOG AND DIGITAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

4.4 VERTICAL DEFLECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

4.5 HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION AND TRIGGERING . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONTENTS

4.6 DIGITAL ACQUISITION AND STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

4.7 ADVANCED VERTICAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.8 ADVANCED HORIZONTAL AND TRIGGER FUNCTIONS . . . . . 4-34

4.9 MEMORY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

4.10 CURSORS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

4.11 MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

4.12 PROCESSING FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

4.13 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

4.14 DELAYED TIMEBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

4.15 HARD COPY FACILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68

4.16 AUTOSET AND SETUP UTILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

4.17 OTHER FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

5 FUNCTION REFERENCE ^{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1}

6 THE CPL PROTOCOL ^{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1}

6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2 EXAMPLE PROGRAM FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6.3 COMMANDS IN FUNCTIONAL ORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6.4 COMMANDS IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

6.5 COMMAND REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

6.6 ACKNOWLEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47

6.7 STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

6.8 SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONTENTS

Appendix A

Appendix B

Appendix C

Appendix D

Appendix E

Appendix F

Appendix G

Appendix H

Appendix J

Appendix K

Appendix L

Appendix M

Appendix N

Appendix P

ACQUIRE menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

CURSORS menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

DISPLAY menu structured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11

MATHEMATICS menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

MEASURE menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

DTB (DEL’D TB) menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

SAVE/RECALL menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

SETUPS menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1

TB MODE menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1

TRIGGER menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1

UTILITY menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1

VERTICAL menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1

RS-232 Cable configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1

FUNCTION INDEX (see Chapter 5) ^{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1}

INDEX ^{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-3}

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

XII

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

XIII

FRONT PANEL CONNECTIONS

Probe Adjust

Squarewave output signal for e.g. probe calibration.

Amplitude is calibrated.

CH1

BNC input socket for vertical channel 1 with probe

indication contact.

CH2

BNC input socket for vertical channel 2 with probe

indication contact.

CH3

BNC input socket for vertical channel 1 with probe

indication contact. (only in 4 channel models)

CH4

BNC input socket for vertical channel 1 with probe

indication contact. (only in 4 channel models)

EXT TRIG

BNC input socket used as an extra external trigger

input with probe indication contact (only in 2 channel

models)

Ground socket (banana): same potential as safety

ground.

The measuring ground socket and the external

conductor of the BNC sockets are internally

connected to the protective earth conductor of the

three-core mains cable. The measuring ground

socket or the external conductor of the BNC-sockets

must not be used as a protective conductor terminal.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

XIV

REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS

Z-MOD

BNC input socket for external intensity-modulation

of the CRT trace.

TXD

RXD DTR

RS-232 BUS (EIA-232-D)

Input/output socket to connect the oscilloscope to an

RS-232 Interface.

RTS NC

DSR CTS

NC=NOT CONNECTED

ST6065

LINE IN

Line input socket. Fuse holder is built in.

FUSE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONAL REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS

CH1 Y-OUT

BNC output socket with a signal derived from the

Channel 1 input signal.

MAIN TB GATE

BNC output socket with a signal that is "high" when

the Main Timebase is running and "low" for the other

conditions.

DTB GATE

BNC output socket with a signal that is "high" when

the Delayed Timebase is running and "low" for the

other conditions.

EXT TRIG (only in 4 channel models)

BNC input socket used as an extra external trigger

input for the Main Timebase

NDAC

DIO4 DIO2

SHIELD SRQ

DAV

EO1 DIO3

ATN IFC FD

DIO1

IEEE 488.2 BUS OPTION

If installed you will find here the input/output

socket to connect the oscilloscope to an

IEEE 488 interface.

GND GND

REN DIO7 DIO5

GND

LOGIC GND

GND 10

GND GND DIO8 DIO6

ST6064

The external conductor of the BNC sockets

and the screening of the interface bus

connectors are internally connected to the

protective earth conductor of the three-core

mains cable. The external conductor of the

BNC sockets and the screening of the

interface bus connectors must not be used as

a protective conductor terminal.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATORS SAFETY

1 - 1

1 OPERATORS SAFETY

ATTENTION: The instrument is designed for indoor use only.

Read this page carefully before installation and use of the

instrument.

1.1 INTRODUCTION

The instrument described in this manual is designed to be used by proper-ly-

trained personnel only. Adjustment, maintenance and repair of the exposed

equipment shall be carried out only by qualified personnel.

1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

For the correct and safe use of this instrument it is essential that both operating

and service personnel follow generally-accepted safety procedures in addition to

the safety precautions specified in this manual. Specific warning and caution

statements, where they apply, will be found throughout the manual. Where

necessary, the warning and caution statements and/or symbols are marked on

the apparatus.

1.3 CAUTION AND WARNING STATEMENTS

CAUTION: Is used to indicate correct operating or maintenance

procedures in order to prevent damage to or destruction of the

equipment or other property.

WARNING: Calls attention to a potential danger that requires correct

procedures or practices in order to prevent personal injury.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1 - 2

OPERATORS SAFETY

1.4 SYMBOLS

Read the safety information in the manual.

Earth.

Conformité Européenne.

Recycling information.

1.5 IMPAIRED SAFETY PROTECTION

The use of the instrument in a manner not specified may impair the protection

provided by the equipment. Before use, inspect the instrument and accessories

for mechanical damage!

Whenever it is likely that safety-protection has been impaired, the instrument

must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended operation. The

matter should then be referred to qualified technicians. Safety protection is likely

to be impaired when, for example, the instrument fails to perform the intended

measurements or shows visible damage.

1.6 MEASURING EARTH

The measuring earth socket and the external conductor of the BNC sockets are

internally connected to the protective earth conductor of the three-core mains

cable. The measuring earth socket or the external conductor of the BNC-sockets

must not be used to connect a protective conductor.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

2 - 1

2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Attention: You are strongly advised to read this chapter thoroughly before

installing your oscilloscope.

2.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

2.1.1

Protective earthing

Before any connection to the input connectors is made, the instrument shall be

connected to a protective earth conductor via the three-core mains cable; the

mains plug shall be inserted only into a socket outlet provided with a protective

earth contact. The protective action shall not be negated by the use of an

extension cord without protective conductor.

WARNING: Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside

the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous.

Intentional interruption is prohibited.

WARNING: When an instrument is brought from a cold into a warm

environment, condensation may cause a hazardous

condition. Therefore, make sure that the grounding

requirements are strictly adhered to.

2.1.2

Mains voltage cord, mains voltage range and fuses

Before inserting the mains plug into the mains socket, make sure that the

instrument is suitable for the local mains voltage.

NOTE: When the mains plug has to be adapted to the local situation, such

adaption should be done by a qualified technician only.

WARNING: The instrument shall be disconnected from all voltage

sources when a fuse is to be renewed.

The oscilloscope has a tapless switched-mode power supply that covers most

nominal voltage ranges in use: ac voltages from 100 ... 240 V (r.m.s.). This

obviates the need to adapt to the local mains (line) voltage. The nominal mains

(line) frequency range is 50 Hz ... 400 Hz.

Line fuse rating: 3.15 AT delayed action, 250 V (for ordering code see

"INITIAL INSPECTION").

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2 - 2

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

The mains (line) fuseholder is located on the rear panel in the mains (line) input

socket. When the mains (line) fuse needs replacing, proceed as follows:

disconnect the oscilloscope from the mains (line).

remove the cover of the fuseholder by means of a small screwdriver.

fit a new fuse of the correct rating and refit the cover of the fuseholder.

WARNING: Make sure that only fuses with the required rated current and

of the specified type are used for replacement. The use of

makeshift fuses and the short-circuiting of fuse holders are

prohibited.

REAR VIEW

Figure 2.1

Rear view of the instrument showing the mains input/fuse-holder

and back-up battery compartment.

When the apparatus is connected to its supply, terminals may be live, and the

opening of covers or removal of parts (except those to which access can be

gained by hand) is likely to expose live parts.

The apparatus shall be disconnected from all voltage sources before it is opened

for any replacement, maintenance or repair.

Capacitors inside the apparatus may still be charged even when the apparatus

has been disconnected from all voltage sources.

Any maintenance and repair of the opened apparatus under voltage shall be

avoided as far as possible and, when inevitable, shall be carried out only by a

skilled person who is aware of the hazard involved.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

2 - 3

2.2 MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERIES

2.2.1

General information

Memory backup is provided to store the oscilloscope’s settings when switched off

so that the instrument returns to the same settings when turned on. Two AA (LR6)

Alkaline batteries are used.

Note:

The batteries are not factory installed and must be installed at the

customer’s site.

Note:

This instrument contains batteries. Do not dispose of these batteries with

other solid waste. Used batteries should be disposed of by a qualified

recycler or hazardous materials handler. Contact your authorized Fluke

Service Center for recycling information.

2.2.2

Installation of batteries

Proceed as follows:

Remove all input signals and disconnect the instrument line power.

Remove the plastic cover of the battery compartment so that the battery

holder becomes accessible.

Install two penlight batteries (AA) in the battery holder as indicated on the

battery holder.

Reinstall the cover of the battery compartment.

Note:

Frontsettings and autocalibration data disappear after exchange of the

batteries with the instrument disconnected from the line power. After

battery exchange, it is necessery to press the CAL key after the

recommended warming up time.

CAUTION: Never leave the batteries in the oscilloscope at ambient temper-

atures outside the rated range of the battery specifications be-

cause of possible damage that may be caused to the

instrument. To avoid battery damage, do not leave the batteries

in the oscilloscope when it is stored longer than 30 days.

2.3 THE FRONT COVER

For ease of removal and reinstallation, the front cover has been designed to snap

on to the front of the instrument.

The front can be removed as follows:

Fold the carrying handle down so that the oscilloscope occupies a sloping

position (refer to Chapter 2.4 for how to proceed).

Pull the clamping lip at the top side of the cover slightly outwards.

Lift the cover off the instrument.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2 - 4

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

2.4 HANDLE ADJUSTMENT AND OPERATING

POSITIONS OF THE INSTRUMENT

By pulling both handle ends outwards away from the instrument, the handle can

be rotated to allow the following instrument positions:

vertical position on its rear feet;

horizontal position on its bottom feet;

in three sloping positions on its handle.

The characteristics mentioned in the REFERENCE MANUAL are guaranteed for

the specified positions or when the handle is folded down.

CAUTION: To avoid overheating, ensure that the ventilation holes in the

covers are free of obstruction. Do not position the instrument

in direct sunlight or on any surface that produces or radiates

heat.

In the rear panel of the instrument there is storage space for the mains cable.

There is also a clamping device to fix the end of the mains cable to the rear panel.

The mains plug then fits in the area where the RS232 connector is present. In this

way the instrument can also stand on its rear feet.

MAT4221

Figure 2.2

Instrument positions

2.5 IEEE 488.2/IEC 625 BUS INTERFACE OPTION

If your oscilloscope is equipped with the IEEE 488.2 interface, it can be used in a

bus system configuration. The protocol used is SCPI (Standard Commands for

Programmable Instruments). For setup information, refer to the function

REMOTE CONTROL IEEE 488.2 in Chapter 5.

The IEEE 488.2 interface is a factory-installed option.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

2 - 5

2.6 RS-232-C SERIAL INTERFACE

Your oscilloscope is equipped with an RS-232-C interface as standard. The

interface can be used in a system for serial communication. The protocol used is

CPL (Compact Programming Language). CPL is a small set of very powerful

commands that can be used for full remote control. Detailed information about this

interface and the CPL protocol is given in Chapter 6 in this manual. For setup

information, refer to the REMOTE CONTROL RS-232 function in Chapter 5

’Function Reference’.

2.7 RACK MOUNTING

The rackmount kit (PM 8960/04) allows you to install the oscilloscope in a

standard 19 inch rack.

It is not necessary to open the oscilloscope itself to mount the rackmount kit.

Installation can be done easily by the user.

2.8 VERSIONS

The model number of your oscilloscope (e.g. PM33...) is indicated on the text strip

above the CRT. This model number is also represented by the digits 6, 7, 8 and 9

of the 12- digit code on the type plate on the rear panel. The ’A’ or ’B’ series is

indicated by a 1 or 2 on the 5th digit.

The instrument’s serial number is also given on the type plate. This number

consists of a six digit code preceeded by the characters ’DM’.

The instrument version can also be displayed on the CRT after having pressed

menu key UTILITY and then softkey MAINTENANCE.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

3 - 1

3 GETTING STARTED

This chapter provides a 10-minute tutorial intended for those who are not familiar

with Fluke oscilloscopes. Those who are already familiar can skip this chapter and

continue to Chapter 4.

3.1 FRONT-PANEL LAYOUT

This oscilloscope is a combination of an analog oscilloscope and a digital storage

oscilloscope in the same instrument. The basic signal acquisition and display

functions are identical in both operating modes. Differences will be explained in

the text. Switching between the two operating modes is done with the yellow

ANALOG key.

The front panel of the oscilloscope is organized into functional areas. The areas

are discussed in order of typical operation.

Figure 3.1

Front panel layout

Note that the front panel shown is that with the most functions. Differences are

explained in Section 4.1. For this getting started procedure, only CH1 and CH2

are used. These are identical for all models.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 - 2

GETTING STARTED

Typical operation of your instrument will be:

Switching on the instrument

Initial standard setup

Screen controls

Auto setup

Analog-Digital mode switching

Vertical setup

Timebase setup

Magnify (Expand)

Direct trigger setup

Pretrigger view

More advanced features

Cursor operation

(see Section 3.2)

(see Section 3.3)

(see Section 3.4)

(see Section 3.5)

(see Section 3.6)

(see Section 3.7)

(see Section 3.8)

(see Section 3.9)

(see Section 3.10)

(see Section 3.11)

(see Section 3.12)

(see Section 3.13)

(see Section 3.14)

(see Section 3.15)

More advanced trigger functions

More signal detail with the DTB

Trace storage

3.2 SWITCHING ON THE INSTRUMENT

Connect the power cord and set the front panel power switch to ON. For any line

source between 100V to 240V nominal, 50/400 Hz, the instrument automatically

turns on. After performing the built-in power-up routine, the instrument is

immediately ready for use. The instrument’s settings will be identical to those

when the oscilloscope was switched off (with the batteries installed).

To ensure that you will get the same setup in all cases, press the STATUS key

and TEXT OFF key simultaneously. This will set the instrument in a predefined

default condition (STANDARD SETUP) and a trace will appear on the screen.

Text is also displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

3 - 3

3.3 SCREEN CONTROLS

The screen controls can be adjusted for optimum trace, text and spot quality by

the controls to the left of the screen.

Figure 3.2

Screen control area

The brightness on the screen is adjusted by two controls, one for the trace and

one for the text.

•

Turn the TRACE INTENSITY control clockwise and verify that only the

brightness of the trace increases.

•

Turn the TEXT INTENSITY control clockwise and verify that only the

brightness of the text increases.

The sharpness of the trace and text is optimized by the FOCUS control.

When you are making photographs

or are in a dark environment, you

can use the ILLUMINATION control

TRACE

ROTATION

to illuminate the graticule of the

screen.

The trace is adjusted in parallel with

the horizontal graticule lines by the

screwdriver-controlled TRACE

ROTATION control.

ST5975

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 - 4

GETTING STARTED

3.4 AUTO SETUP

The best way to start each measurement is by using the AUTOSET key. This

automatically finds and scales all relevant parameters on all channels.

AUTO SET

ST6659

9303

Figure 3.3

Measuring setup

Connect the probe as shown in figure 3.3.

Step 1

NOTE:

AUTOSET is programmable. Because you have set the instrument in the

"standard setup" before (see Section 3.2), all programmable features are

set to a predefined condition and the instrument is set in the analog mode.

Programming of AUTOSET is explained in Chapters 4 and 5.

Step 2

Step 3

Press the AUTOSET key.

The scope flashes the message ’AUTO SETTING...’ on the screen. In

a few seconds the front-panel settings are adjusted for an optimized

display of the applied signal in the analog mode.

The calibration signal is clearly displayed.

The parameters of the channel and the timebase settings are

displayed at the bottom of the screen.

MTB 200µs CH1

CH1 200mV

ST6704

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

3 - 5

Step 4

To prevent measurement errors, check the pulse response before any

measurement. If the pulse shows overshoot or undershoot, you can

correct this by using the trimmer in the probe’s body. Chapter 4

describes how to adjust the pulse response.

ST5952

In most cases, using AUTO SETUP is sufficient for a good initial display of the

signal(s). After the initial AUTOSET, and to optimize the signal for a more detailed

view, continue with the paragraphs below.

NOTE:

If you get lost when adjusting your instrument, just press AUTOSET.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 - 6

GETTING STARTED

3.5 MODE SWITCHING BETWEEN ANALOG AND

DIGITAL OPERATING MODES

You can use the yellow ANALOG key to switch from the analog mode to the digital

mode and back at any time. The signal acquisition and display functions of both

operating modes are very similar. However, the nature of the signals you are

using may determine which operating mode you prefer to use. For more

information, refer to the following table:

SIGNAL CRITERIA

ANALOG MODE

Usable

DIGITAL MODE

Usable

Repetitive signals of

30 Hz and higher

Repetitive signals

below 30 Hz

Causes display

flickering

Preferred

Single events

Displayed for the

duration of

the event

Can capture and

display for long

term display

Repetitive signals that are

amplitude modulated

Preferred

May cause alaising

Use Peak detect or

Envelope mode

Repetitive signals that

are modulated in frequency

May cause aliasing.

Use Envelope mode.

Long serial data streams

Preferred when

Delayed sweep

is not used.

When using delayed

sweep to observe

details, Digital mode

provides better

light output.

Video signals

Preferred when

Delayed sweep

is not used.

When using delayed

sweep to observe

details, Digital mode

provides better

light output.

OTHER CRITERIA

Need to see pretrigger

information

Not possible

Up to full acquisition

length

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

SIGNAL CRITERIA

3 - 7

ANALOG MODE

DIGITAL MODE

You need to make adjustments

to the circuitry and watch

the signal change

Fastest

display

update

Slower

display

update

Automatic measurements

Can’t use

Fully implemented

All functions

Signal Math

Add, Subtract

Add, Subtract, Multiply

Signal Analysis

Integration,

Not available

Full analysis

(optional)

Differentiation, FFT

Automatic Pass/Fail test

Autorange attenuator

Not available

Fully implemented

(optional)

Results in a displayed

signal with an ampli-

tude of 2 to 6.4 divi-

sions

Autorange timebase

Not available

Results in a signal

display of 2 to 6

waveform periods

ANALOG

RUN/STOP

ST6680

9312

Figure 3.4

Analog-Digital switching setup

Step 1

Step 2

Press AUTOSET. The scope performs an AUTOSET in analog mode.

Press the ANALOG key to change over to the digital mode. Check that

the picture is identical to the one in the analog mode. The text ’DIGITAL

MODE’ is displayed briefly at the bottom of the screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 - 8

GETTING STARTED

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Press AUTOSET again. This time the scope performs the autoset in

digital mode.

Press the RUN/STOP key and observe that the trace is frozen and

stays on screen even after removing the probe.

Press the RUN/STOP key to display the actual input signal again.

Reconnect the probe to display the Probe Adjust signal again.

Press the ANALOG button once again to return to the analog mode. In

the bottom of the screen, the text ’ANALOG MODE‘ is briefly displayed.

3.6 VERTICAL SETUP

This section deals with setting of the input circuits of the four channels. The main

adjustments are AMPLitude, POSition, and the channel input coupling selection

for GND, DC, and AC.

Figure 3.5

Step 1

Vertical setup

Adjust the absolute ground level by disconnecting the signal and using

the POS control to position the trace in the middle of the screen. A

marker with the channel number (’1-’) at the left of the screen indicates

the ground reference.

POS

MAT4191

Step 2

Reconnect the probe to the Probe Adjust signal for display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

3 - 9

Step 3

You can change the amplitude of the signal in a 1, 2, 5 sequence by

pressing one of the AMPL keys. Note that the bottom of the screen

shows the AMPL/DIV setting of CH1.

CH1 100mV

500mV

CH1

ST6681

Step 4

Step 5

Press the ON button of CH2 and observe that a second trace is now

visible. The position and amplitude of this channel can be adjusted

similar to the adjustment of CH1. The channel settings are also

displayed in the bottom of the screen.

Press the ON key of CH2 once again to turn this channel off.

Press the AC DC/GND key of CH1 so that a ’⊥’ sign is displayed in the

bottom text line. This interrupts the input signal and connects the input

to the ground. In this case, only the ’base’ line is visible.

Press the AC DC/GND key once again for ac input coupling; the

bottom text line now displays ’~’.

In most cases, dc input coupling is used to show ac as well as dc components of

the signal. However, in some cases where a small ac signal is superimposed on

a large dc voltage, ac input coupling must be used. Then only the ac component

is visible on the screen. The text line shows a ’=’ or ’~’ sign to indicate dc or ac

coupling. Because the calibration signal is a square wave with a low level of 0V

and a high level of +600 mV, the screen shows either of the following two displays:

AC INPUT COUPLING

DC INPUT COUPLING

ZERO

LEVEL

ZERO

LEVEL

MTB 200µs

CH1

MTB 200µs CH1

CH1 200mV

200mV

CH1

ST6682

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 - 10

GETTING STARTED

Step 6

Step 7

Press the ANALOG key to enter the digital mode

Press the top one (mV) of the AMPL keys, so that the signal has

maximum amplitude.

Press AUTO RANGE and see the signal change to a suitable

attenuator value. When AUTO RANGE is active, the attenuators

automatically adjust when the signal amplitude changes, to keep the

trace on screen.

Step 8

NOTE:

Press the key labeled AVERAGE. Noise in the input signal can be

reduced by using the average function. The random noise is reduced

by calculating the average over the last n scans (average factor can be

set between 2 and 4096)

Refer to Chapter 4 for an explanation of the CH1+CH2, TRIG1, and

INV keys.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

3 - 11

3.7 TIMEBASE SETUP

The next step is the adjustment of the main timebase controls (TIME/DIV, X

POSition, and MAGNIFY keys).

X POS

MAGNIFY

AUTO

RANGE

TIME/DIV

VAR

ST6435

9312

Figure 3.6

Timebase setup

Step 1

Step 2

Press the AUTOSET key.

Use the TIME/DIV keys on the right hand side of the instrument to

decrease or increase the number of periods of the signal on the

screen.

TIME/DIV

MTB 500µs

MTB 100µs

ST6683

Step 3

Step 4

Select a timebase of 1 ms/div.

Press AUTO RANGE and see the signal display change to a more

suitable timebase. The AUTO RANGE function automatically selects a

timebase that displays 2 to 6 signal periods.

Step 5

Step 6

Press the ANALOG key to switch the scope to the analog mode.

Turn the X POS control to shift the signal horizontally (left or right)

across the screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 - 12

GETTING STARTED

3.8 MAGNIFY (EXPAND)

Step 1

You can use the MAGNIFY keys to expand the signal on the screen.

The ’MGN’ indication and the corrected timebase setting are displayed

in the text line.

In the analog mode, magnification is limited to 10. The right key will

activate the magnification. The left key will turn off the MAGNIFY

function. On or off is indicated by ’MGN’ in the bottom of the screen.

Step 2

Step 3

Press the ANALOG key to switch the scope to the digital mode.

In the digital mode, pressing the right MAGNIFY key expands the

signal in 1,

32 times. Pressing the

* *^2,*^{4 ...steps to a maximum of}

left MAGNIFY key compresses the signal to 1 again. When you

operate the MAGNIFY buttons, or when you turn the X POSition

control, a bargraph is displayed showing which part of the digital trace

is expanded.

NOTE:

The MAGNIFY key and X POS control can also be used after the

oscilloscope is STOPped.

5.00µs

10 DIV

1.25µs

10 DIV

START OF TIME WINDOW CAN BE VARIED WITH

X POS OVER THE WHOLE SWEEP RANGE.

1.00ms

40 DIV

ST6684

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

3 - 13

3.9 DIRECT TRIGGER SETUP

Now you are ready to set your trigger conditions. You will use one of the channel

selection keys (TRIG1, TRIG2, TRIG3, TRIG4 or EXT TRIG) and the TRIGGER

LEVEL control.

Figure 3.7

Step 1

Direct trigger setup

Press the AUTOSET key. The square-wave signal of the Probe Adjust

output is now displayed on channel 1. Turn channel 2 on to display a

second horizontal trace (channel 2 has no input signal).

Step 2

Step 3

Press the TRIG2 key so that channel 2 is selected as the trigger

source. The result is that the signal on channel 1 is no longer triggered

(not stable). The ARM’D LED is on, to indicate that the oscilloscope is

not triggered. Check also that the right side of the bottom text line

indicates the trigger source (’ch2’).

Only in 2 channel models

Press EXT TRIG key to select External Trigger input as the trigger

source. Check that the rightside of the bottom textline indicates the

trigger source ’EXT’.

Step 4

Step 5

Press the TRIG1 key. Channel 1 is now selected as the trigger source.

The ’ch1’ symbol is displayed in the bottom text line. Triggering

resumes. Turn channel 2 off, by pressing ON again.

Press the ns key of the MainTB TIME/DIV keys until the timebase is

set to ’2 µs/div’.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 - 14

GETTING STARTED

Step 6

The same TRIG1 key that was used to select the trigger source is also

used to select the trigger slope. Repeatedly pressing the TRIG1 button

changes the triggering so that it occurs on the leading or trailing edge

of the input signal. Note that the slope is also displayed in the bottom

text line.

TRIG1

MTB 2µs

200mV

CH1

200mV

MTB 2µs

CH1

ST6685

Step 7

For repetitive signals, you obtain a stable display when each

successive timebase sweep is triggered at the same stable level of the

input signal. You use the TRIGGER LEVEL control to adjust the level.

Turn the control. The precise position in relation to the maximum signal

amplitude (between +100 % and -100 %) is displayed on the screen.

SUMMARY

The previous steps covered the basic adjustments. Now you are ready to look

at the special features of the oscilloscope. This includes the use of the cursors,

advanced trigger functions and using the second (delayed) timebase for signal

details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

3 - 15

3.10 PRE-TRIGGER VIEW

One of the powerful features in the digital mode is the ability to capture and view

signal contents prior to the actual trigger. The amount of pretrigger information

can be as long as one full acquisition/record. The trigger position is adjusted with

the TRIGGER POSITION control.

Step 1

Turn the TRIGGER POSITION control counter clockwise. Now the

triggering edge shifts to the center of the screen. A trigger point marker

(s) indicates the trigger point. The part to the left of the marker is called

pretrigger view. The pretrigger view is indicated in the bottom of the

screen (in divisions)

TRIGGER

POSITION

DELAY=−5.00dV

ST6686

PRE-TRIGGER

VIEW

Step 2

The TRIGGER POSITION control can also be used to adjust time

delay. Rotate the TRIGGER POSITION control clockwise until the

readout displays "0". When you continue to turn the TRIGGER

POSITION control clockwise, a positive delay between trigger point

and acquisition is set. The delay is no longer read out in divisions of

pretrigger information, but in seconds, or fractions of seconds to

indicate how much delay is used.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 - 16

GETTING STARTED

3.11 MORE ADVANCED FEATURES

All basic functions are accessed by dedicated keys for fast and easy operation.

Some of the more advanced features are menu operated. Menus are called up by

pressing one of the keys identified with blue text on the front panel. After you

press one of these keys, a menu is displayed on the right side of the screen. This

menu gives you access to the more advanced functions of the oscilloscope. Use

the blue softkeys to the right of the screen to select the desired functions; the

selected function is indicated by the highlighted text.

TRIGGER WITH

MENUKEY

TRIGGER

ST6433

9303

SOFTKEYS

Figure 3.8

Step 1

Menu keys and softkeys

Press the key marked TRIGGER.

Check that the ’TRIGGER MAINTB’ menu is displayed at the right side

of the screen.

After changing the setting, you can deactivate the menu again to use

the full screen for the signal.

There are two ways to do this:

- Press the TRIGGER key once again.

- Press the TEXT OFF key.

The TEXT OFF key operates in a 1-2-3 cycle, and allows you to blank

the bottom text line as well.

TRIGGER

MAIN TB

edge tv

logic

ch1

line

TEXT OFF

MTB 200µs

MTB 200µs CH1

CH1 200mV

CH1

CH1 200mV

TEXT OFF

ST6679

Step 2

Use both methods to familiarize yourself with turning the menus and

the bottom text line on and off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

3 - 17

3.12 CURSOR OPERATION

Cursors are used for accurate amplitude or time measurements of the signal.

CURSORS

∆

TRACK

ST6431

9303

Figure 3.9

Step 1

Cursor setup

Before you continue, reset the instrument with the STANDARD

SETUP. To do this, press the STATUS key and TEXT OFF key

simultaneously. Now the instrument is set in the default condition and

operates in analog mode.

Step 2

Step 3

Press the AUTOSET key.

Press the CURSORS key to enter the cursors menu.

CURSORS

The menu is now displayed on the screen and the

cursors are turned on.

on off

Step 4

Use the second blue softkey from the top to select

one of the three cursor modes:

- Amplitude cursor measurements, indicated by ’=’.

- Time cursor measurements, indicated by ’||’ for

measuring time or frequency.

- Amplitude and time measurements, indicated by

’#’. The top text line displays the result of the

READ OUT

measurements (∆V or ∆T).

ST6430

Step 5

Step 6

Press the second bluesoft key until ’||’ is highlighted.

The TRACK control moves both cursors at the same time. For

example, to measure the period time of the input signal, set the left

(reference) cursor to a rising edge of the signal.

Step 7

The ∆ control moves the right cursor only. Set this cursor the next rising

edge of the signal.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 - 18

GETTING STARTED

Step 8

The top text line now shows the pulse repetition time of the signal

(e.g., ch1: ∆T= 500 µs).

CURSORS

ch1:

∆T= 500µs

on off

READ OUT

CH1

200µs

MTB

CH1 200mV

ST6687

Step 9

NOTE:

Press the second blue softkey until ’=’ is highlighted. Now perform a

peak-to-peak measurement and check that the amplitude of the signal

(’∆V’) is 600 mV.

When you select ’#’, the fifth blue softkey is automatically activated so

that you can choose between using the controls for positioning the

vertical cursors (’||’) or the horizontal cursors (’=’).

The ’READOUT’ submenu is explained in Chapter 4.

Step 10 Select the vertical cursors again.

Step 11 Now switch to the digital mode. Notice the changing readout and the

’X’ indicating where the trace and the cursors intersect. Since the trace

is digitized, the cursors can be really smart. In the digital mode you can

measure time differences (∆T) and amplitude differences (∆V) at the

same time.

CURSORS

ch1:

∆T= 500µs

∆V= 600mV

on off

ch1

READ OUT

CH1

200µs

MTB

CH1 200mV

ST6688

9303

Step 12 Use the first blue softkey to turn the cursors off. The cursor menu

disappears.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

3 - 19

3.13 MORE ADVANCED TRIGGER FUNCTIONS

Most of the trigger functions (source, slope, and level) can be controlled with

direct access to the functions (see Section 3.9). A CRT menu is used for more

advanced trigger functions.

TRIGGER

ARM’D

TRIGGER

LEVEL

TB MODE

ST6432

9303

Figure 3.10 More advanced trigger setup

Press the menu key TRIGGER. This

turns the menu on. An extensive set of

functions is now displayed.

All functions are explained in Chapter 4. For most applications, this menu is not

needed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 - 20

GETTING STARTED

3.14 MORE SIGNAL DETAIL WITH THE DELAYED

TIMEBASE

When you need to study a part of a signal in more detail, a second (delayed)

timebase is available. This timebase has its own timebase settings and trigger

level adjustment. Additional selections are made in the DELAYED TIMEBASE

menu.

DISPLAY

MAGNIFY

TRIGGER

POSITION

DELAYED TIMEBASE

DELAY

DTB

TIME/DIV ns

TB MODE

ST6439

9303

Figure 3.11 Delayed timebase setup

Step 1

Press the STATUS key and TEXT OFF key at the same time for

STANDARD SETUP.

Then shift to trace to the upper half of the screen as indicated.

CH1 50mV

MTB 1.00ms

ch1

ST6690

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

3 - 21

Step 2

Press the DTB key. The DELAYED TIME BASE menu is now displayed

on screen. Turn the delayed time base on with the first softkey.

DELAYED

TIME BASE

DEL’D TB

on off

MAIN TB

on off

starts

trig’d

TRACE

SEP

MTB1.00ms

DTB 100µs 4.882ms

ch1

CH1 50mV

ST6689

The upper trace is the main timebase trace. This first trace shows an intensified

part. Adjust the TRACE INTENSITY with the control as necessary. The lower

trace is the delayed timebase trace and is an expanded representation of the

intensified part in the upper trace.

Step 3

Turn the DELAY knob to shift the intensified part and to select which

part of the main timebase you want to magnify.

Step 4

The delayed timebase TIME/DIV keys are used to select the

’magnification factor’. Notice the changing delayed timebase ’TIME/

DIV’ readout at the bottom of the screen.

Step 5

The ’T’ symbol at the fourth blue softkey indicates that the cursor

TRACK control can be used to make adjustments. In this menu the

cursor TRACK control is used to change the TRACE SEParation, which

is the distance between the main timebase and the delayed timebase.

The delayed timebase can be used in the triggered mode. The triggered mode is

selected with the STARTS/TRIG’D softkey. The function of the triggered mode will

be explained in Chapter 4. For this part of "Getting Started", remain in the

STARTS mode.

Step 6

Switch the menu off with the TEXT OFF key. Notice that the delayed

timebase is still active and that the most important functions (DELAY

control and TIME/DIV key pair) still allow you to operate the delayed

timebase.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 - 22

GETTING STARTED

3.15 TRACE STORAGE

In the digital mode you not only have the ability to store traces on the screen

(using the RUN/STOP key), but also to store traces in memory for later use.

ANALOG

SAVE RECALL

RUN/STOP

ST6691

9312

Figure 3.12 Digital memory setup

Store traces on screen:

Step 1

Step 2

Press AUTOSET.

Make sure that the scope is in the digital mode. If not, press the

ANALOG key to enter the digital mode.

Step 3

With the RUN/STOP key, new acquisitions are stopped and the display

is frozen. Removing the input signal or pressing a key has no effect on

the display. Stopping the acquisition is very useful to do measurements

on the signal or to make a hard copy.

Step 4

Press the RUN/STOP key to reactivate the acquisition.

Store traces in memory:

Step 5 For this step-by-step introduction you will first clear all memory

locations so that all unnecessary traces are removed.

- press the SAVE menu key.

- select CLEAR & PROTECT.

- select CLEAR ALL.

- in the confirm menu, select YES.

Sometimes there will be a second confirm menu. Select YES again to

clear protected traces as well.

Press the TEXT OFF key to turn the menu off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

3 - 23

Here is how traces are stored in memory:

Step 6

Step 7

Use the TRACK control to select an empty memory

location such as m1, m2, or m3. Empty locations are

marked with a circle in front of the memory location

SAVE ACQ

MEMORY

number (e.g.,

m3).

save

clear

copy

Press the second blue softkey (’save’). You have

now saved the acquisition signal into memory

’register’ m3. A single register can contain a set of up

to three traces (e.g., CH1, CH2, and EXT (trigger

view)). In this case only one input channel was

turned on, so that only one was stored.

Step 8

Step 9

Remove the probe from CH1. Now recall the stored

trace.

CLEAR &

PROTECT

ST6705

Press the RECALL key.

Step 10 Select the previously filled memory register m3 with the TRACK

control. A memory register with trace information is indicated with

Step 11 Press the second blue softkey to turn on the display of this register.

Indicated by

Step 12 Turn the ∆ control to separate the acquisition (live signal) and the trace

recalled from memory.

NOTE:

You are now able to operate nearly all the oscilloscope’s functions in

most routine applications. Please continue with Chapter 4 for a more

detailed description of the oscilloscope’s many advanced features.

Memory indications:

Empty register

Filled register

Displayed register

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 1

4 HOW TO USE MORE ADVANCED

FUNCTIONS OF THE INSTRUMENT

This chapter allows more experienced oscilloscope users to learn more about the

advanced features of this instrument and how to use them. For a complete

description of each function, refer to the next chapter in this manual: "Function

Reference".

This chapter explains the basics of each function and gives examples are given

in a step by step sequence.

Less experienced oscilloscope users should read Chapter 3 before beginning this

chapter.

4.1 INTRODUCTION

All of the oscilloscope models in the PM337xB, PM338xB and PM339xB family

combine the features and operation of an analog oscilloscope with that of a full-

featured Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO). Switching between one mode of

operation to the other is done by pressing one (yellow) push button.

Most signal acquisition functions are identical for both modes of operation, even

though the digital mode allows for pretrigger acquisition and display, plus more

powerful logic triggering.

Delayed sweep operation is available in both operating modes.

Cursors operate in both modes.

The digital mode provides access to many powerful calculated measurement and

signal analysis functions.

It also has a completely new feature called AUTO RANGE.

AUTO RANGE automatically adjusts the attenuator or the timebase setting when

the amplitude or the frequency of the signal has changed.

This family of oscilloscopes is available with a 60 MHz, 100 MHz or 200 MHz

bandwidth. There are full four-channel instruments as well as 2+2 channel

models.

The economy version have 2 full channels and an external trigger channel.

PM3394B 200 MHz Full Four Channel Oscilloscope.

The PM3394B offers a 200 MHz bandwidth. Four channels provide equal

bandwidth, and sensitivity ranges. Each channel has full AC/DC/GND coupling

capabilities.

In VERTMENU each channel is set to 50Ω or 1 MΩ input impedance.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 2

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

PM3390B 200 MHz 2 Channel Oscilloscope

The PM3390B has the same capabilities as the PM3394B on the channels 1 and

2. The channels 3 and 4 are replaced by an external trigger channel. This channel

can only be used as an additional trigger input channel. Signal manipulation as in

the full channels 1 and 2 is not possible. The external trigger signal can be

displayed by using the function TRIG VIEW.

PM3384B 100 MHz Full Four-Channel Oscilloscope

Bandwidth is 100 MHz.

The PM3384B has the same capabilities as the PM3394B. VERT MENU only

offers BW LIMIT selection.

PM3380B 100 MHz 2 Channel Oscilloscope

The PM3380B has the same capabilities as the PM3384B on the channels 1 and

2. The channels 3 and 4 are replaced by an external trigger channel as in the

PM3390B. VERT Menu offers only BWLIMIT selection.

PM3370B 60 MHz 2 Channel Oscilloscope

The PM3370B has a bandwidth of 60 MHz. All other features are equal to those

of the PM3380B.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 3

FRONT PANEL LAYOUT

The controls on the front panel are grouped by function. In this chapter, a

description for each group of controls is given in the following sequence:

Display and probe adjustment

Analog and digital modes

Vertical deflection

Horizontal deflection and triggering

Digital acquisition and storage

Advanced vertical functions

Advanced horizontal and trigger functions

Memory functions

Cursor functions

Measurement functions

Processing functions

Display functions

Delayed timebase

(see section 4.2)

(see section 4.3)

(see section 4.4)

(see section 4.5)

(see section 4.6)

(see section 4.7)

(see section 4.8)

(see section 4.9)

(see section 4.10)

(see section 4.11)

(see section 4.12)

(see section 4.13)

(see section 4.14)

(see section 4.15)

(see section 4.16)

Hard copy facilities

AUTOSET and other utilities

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 4

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

Study the front panel of your oscilloscope and observe what functions the different

controls and push buttons (keys) perform. There are three different styles of push

buttons, plus the blue softkeys adjacent to the screen. The push button functions

are as follows:

Direct function key. These keys provide direct access to specific

functions as labeled on the front panel. Examples include

AUTOSET for automatic setup of the oscilloscope and AC DC

(GND) for selection of the instrument’s input coupling.

Menu initialization key, with blue text. Press to produce a menu on

the screen from which you can select functions that are related to

the function name of this key.

Key pair. These pairs serve as up/down controls. They are used to

select a value from a range.

Softkey. Press to select a function from the menu that has been

initialized by pressing one of the menu initialization keys.

Rotary control. Used for continuously variable control of a function.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 5

4.2 DISPLAY AND PROBE ADJUSTMENTS

To help you follow the step-by-step descriptions, each section begins by recalling

the standard setting as outlined below.

If you get "lost", you can return to the beginning of each section, because all

functions are set to a predefined state to create a correct start situation.

RECALL STANDARD SETTING

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys.

Recalling the standard setting always results in a trace on the display, even with

no signal applied to the oscilloscope inputs. Refer for a list of the standard setting

to the section "STANDARD SETUP/FRONT PANEL RESET" of Chapter 5.

DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT

Before going through the examples that introduce you to

features of this oscilloscope, adjust the display as follows:

Turn the TRACE INTENSITY control for optimum trace

brightness.

Turn the TEXT INTENSITY control for optimum

display brightness of the text.

Adjust trace alignment with the graticule by using the

screwdriver control TRACE ROTATION.

Turn the FOCUS control until a sharp trace is

obtained.

You can turn the GRATICULE ILLUMINATION control

to illuminate the graticule lines as desired.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 6

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

DISPLAY LAYOUT

The following illustration shows the layout of the display with a maximum amount

of text.

Most text is active only when specific functions are activated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 7

MENUS

TEXT OFF

A menu appears when a key with blue text is pressed.

The menu functions can be selected by pressing the blue softkeys to the right side

of the screen.

Press the ANALOG key to select the digital mode.

Press the DISPLAY key to activate the menu.

Each menu starts with a menu name, which

DISPLAY

corresponds with the key that was used to select the

menu. This is sometimes followed by a second name of

the softkey that initialized a submenu.

WINDOWS

on off

The windows function can be switched on and off by

pressing the corresponding blue softkey.

VERT

MAGNIFY

indicates that a selection must be made with the

off

TRACK control.

X vs Y

The arrow ( ) behind TEXT indicates that there is a

submenu.

TEXT

dots

linear

sine

The bottom softkey switches (toggles) between the

three functions.

ST7415

9312

You can turn off the text by pressing the TEXT OFF key. This can be done to free

up the display area.

Press the TEXT OFF key three times.

Observe that the text mode follows the following sequence: menu off, settings off,

both on.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 8

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

CAL SIGNAL AND PROBE ADJUSTMENT

Each measuring probe has been checked and adjusted before delivery. However,

to match the probe to your oscilloscope, you must perform the following

procedure to optimize the pulse response of the combination of oscilloscope input

and probes.

Connect the probe body to channel 1.

Connect the probe tip to the Probe Adjust output of the oscilloscope.

Press the AUTOSET key.

If the display looks like one of the two displays shown on the left, you must adjust

your probe to get the display shown on the right.

The probe output impedance can be adjusted through a hole in the compensation

box of the probe to obtain optimum pulse response. Refer to the following figure.

ST6024

9303

Adjust the probe until the screen shows the correct compensation.

The probe is now adjusted for optimum pulse response with this oscilloscope. If

you connect the probe to another channel or oscilloscope, it must be adjusted

again to that oscilloscope input.

Repeat this adjustment for the second probe.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 9

4.3 ANALOG AND DIGITAL MODES

ANALOG

This instrument is a combination of an analog real-time oscilloscope and

a digital storage oscilloscope, which offers a variety of additional features.

The combination of analog and digital modes in one instrument gives

you the advantages of both modes.

In the ANALOG MODE the signal is directly written on the screen. The result is

the "traditional" real-time signal representation. Because of the high update rate

and infinite resolution, this image gives signal details that are visible only on true

analog oscilloscopes.

In the DIGITAL MODE the input signal is sampled. These samples are stored in

memory so that mathematics, calculated measurements, printing, and other

memory functions can be performed on the trace.

You can use the yellow ANALOG push button to switch from the analog mode to

the digital mode and back at any time. The signal acquisition and display functions

of both operating modes are very similar. However, the nature of the signals you

are using may determine which operating mode you prefer to use. For more

information, refer to the following table:

SIGNAL CRITERIA

ANALOG MODE

Usable

DIGITAL MODE

Usable

Repetitive signals of

30 Hz and higher

Repetitive signals

below 30 Hz

Causes display

flickering

Preferred

Single events

Display for

duration of

the event

Can capture and

display for long

term

Repetitive signals that

are amplitude modulated

Preferred

May cause aliasing.

Use Peak detect or

Envelope mode

Repetitive signals that

are modulated in frequency

Preferred

May cause aliasing.

Use Envelope mode.

Long serial data streams

Preferred when

Delayed sweep

is not used.

When using delayed

sweep to observe

details, Digital mode

provides better

light output.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 10

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

SIGNAL CRITERIA

Video signals

ANALOG MODE

DIGITAL MODE

Preferred when

Delayed sweep

is not used.

When using delayed

sweep to observe

details, Digital mode

provides better light

output.

OTHER CRITERIA

Need to see pretrigger

information

Not possible

Up to one screen

You need to make adjustments

to the circuitry and watch

the signal change

Fastest

display update

Slower display

update

Automatic measurements

Can’t use

Fully implemented

All functions

Signal Math

Add, Subtract only

Add, Subtract, Multiply

Signal Analysis

Integration,

Not available

Full analysis, with

Math Plus option

installed

Differentiation, FFT

Automatic Pass/Fail test

Autorange attenuator

Not available

Fully implemented,

with Math Plus option

installed

Results in a

displayed signal with

an amplitude of 2 to

6.4 divisions

Autorange timebase

Not Available

Results in a signal

display of 2 to 6

waveform periods

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 11

STANDARD SETTING

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channel 1.

The Probe Adjust signal, now supplied to the input, is a square wave with a lower

level of 0V and a top level of 600 mV. The oscilloscope always operates in analog

mode after a recall of the standard setting.

Press the AUTOSET key for optimum signal display.

ANALOG TO DIGITAL MODE SWITCHING

Switching from analog to digital mode and vice-versa can be done by pressing the

yellow ANALOG key. If no Digital mode-only features were activated, you can

switch between the modes with no changes in the display.

Press the ANALOG key again.

The oscilloscope is automatically set in the digital mode. This is indicated by a

message ’DIGITAL MODE’ that appears briefly on the screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 12

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

TRACE STORAGE

RUN/STOP

The digital mode offers a set of powerful features. One of the most important

advantages is that you can store one or more traces in memory or on screen.

Press the RUN/STOP key to stop the signal acquisition and freeze the

display on the screen.

The trace is frozen and stays on the screen. Observe that the signal stays stored

even when you remove the probe.

Now the instrument has been STOPped, and most keys have been disabled. The

only keys that continue to function are those directly related to display functions.

This includes trace shift using the POS control. All measurement functions are still

operable.

A frozen trace can be used for comparisons with other traces, mathematics,

cursor measurements, automatic measurements and more.

The RUN/STOP key is used to end the STOP mode and start the aquisition again.

Press the RUN/STOP key.

This starts the acquisition again so that the actual input signal is displayed. You

can use the RUN/STOP key at any time.

RUN/STOP

RUNNING

FROZEN

ST6482

9312

NOTE: The following section explains the basic functions regardless of

operating mode. The oscilloscope will react almost identically in either

mode. Where necessary, different behavior will be explained.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 13

4.4 VERTICAL DEFLECTION

VERT MENU

AVERAGE

The section shown on the left contains all

direct vertical deflection controlls for the input

channels 1 and 2.

POS

TRIG1

TRIG2

AUTO

RANGE CH1+CH2

AUTO

RANGE

AMPL

INV

Refer to Section 4.1 for the differences

between model numbers.

AC DC

GND

AC DC

GND

To start this section with the settings in a

predefined state, you must recall the

standard setting.

ST6437

9312

STANDARD SETTING

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channel 1.

The Probe Adjust signal, now supplied to the input, is a square wave with a lower

level of 0V and a top level of 600 mV.

Press the AUTOSET key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 14

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

VERTICAL COUPLING

AC, DC, GND

The input coupling after AUTOSET is ac. Since the Probe Adjust signal is a pulse

type signal with a 50% duty cycle, its mean value is at the signal’s 50% amplitude

level. When the input is ac coupled, the mean value will be displayed at the

ground level of the oscilloscope. As a result of this, the displayed waveform is

centered on the screen.

AC coupling can be used to examine small ac components that are superimposed

on large dc voltages.

Press the AC DC GND key once for DC input coupling.

Since the Probe Adjust signal is a pulse-type signal with a lower level of 0V, and

a higher level of 600 mV, and since the oscilloscope adjusts the display position

of the ground level to coincide with the screen center, switching from ac coupling

to dc coupling results in an upward shift of the display position of the signal.

The coupling sign in the lower left hand corner of the screen changes from ∼ (ac)

to = (dc).

The ground level for each of the channels is indicated by a dash after the channel

identifier, i.e., ’1-’ for the ground level of channel 1.

0.5ms

600mV

Input Signal

AC DC

GND

AC DC

GND

AUTO SET

AC DC

GND

CH1 200mV

200mV

CH1 200mV

CH1

DC Coupled

GND Coupled

AC Coupled

ST6708

Press the AC DC GND key to obtain ground coupling.

A straight line is now displayed. This is the 0V (ground) level of the input. This

level serves as the 0 volt reference for amplitude measurements.

The coupling sign ’⊥’ now indicates ground coupling.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 15

VERTICAL

POSITION

Use the POS control to adjust the ground level to any desired vertical

position on the screen.

POS

ST6158

9303

POS

MAT4171

Use the position control to position the line in the middle of the screen.

Observe that the channel identifier ’1-’ shifts with the trace.

Press the AC DC GND key again to obtain ac input coupling.

Since the Probe Adjust signal is a pulse type signal with a 50% duty cycle, its

mean value is at the 50% amplitude level of the input signal. When the input is ac

coupled, the mean value will be displayed at the ground level of the oscilloscope.

As a result of this, the displayed waveform is centered on the screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 16

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

VERTICAL

AMPLITUDE

Press the upper key of the AMPL keys

AMPL

Pressing the upper key increases the amplitude of the displayed

waveform. As the amplitude of the displayed waveform changes, the

screen readout of the input sensitivity changes as well.

If you adjust the displayed amplitude to 6 divisions, you will notice that

the readout in the lower left hand corner of the screen reads 100 mV/div.

The amplitude of the signal is then: 100 mV/div times 6 div = 600 mV.

ST6159

AMPL

CH1

100mV

500mV

CH1

AMPL/div

MAT4165

Try other sensitivity settings as follows :

Use the AMPL keys to step through the attenuator range.

Observe that the sensitivity readout changes in steps following a 1, 2, 5

sequence. The AMPL keys allow you to step up and down through the

sensitivities from 5 V/div to 2 mV/div and vice-versa. This sequence enables a

quick selection between the oscilloscope’s sensitivity positions and are such that

almost every input signal can be made visible with sufficient amplitude.

Adjust AMPL to 100 mV.

A waveform with an amplitude of six divisions is displayed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 17

VERTICAL

AUTO RANGE

AUTO

RANGE

The AUTO RANGE function results in an amplitude display of 2 to 6

divisions.

Press the AUTO RANGE key.

Observe that the amplitude of the signal changes from 6 divisions to 3 divisions.

In the upper right corner of the display ATT 1 is displayed. This indicates that the

AUTO RANGE function is active on input channel 1.

Press the upper AMPL key once.

The AUTO RANGE function is switched off and the ATT 1 indication disappears

The attenuator is now back in manual control.

VERTICAL

VARIABLE AMPLITUDE

AMPL

Press both AMPL buttons simultaneously to select the VARiable

mode. This mode is used to make fine adjustments of the input

amplitude settings between the 1-2-5 steps.

When the VARiable mode is turned off, the oscilloscope selects the

nearest ’1-2-5’ value.

ST5971

Enter the VAR mode by simultaneously pressing both AMPL keys.

Adjust amplitude with either AMPL key.

Observe that the sensitivity steps that can be selected are much finer than before

and that the displayed amplitude is continuously adjustable.

Note:

The VAR values are calibrated amplitude settings as well. This enables

you to make accurate measurements and readouts even when

intermediate settings are used.

Adjust AMPL to 220 mV.

Press both AMPL keys to turn the VARiable mode off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 18

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

VERTICAL

CH1+CH2

Using two probes, connect the Probe Adjust signal to Ch1 and Ch2.

Press AUTOSET.

Both Ch1 and Ch2 are now displayed.

Adjust POS and AMPL to get a display as illustrated on the left below.

Press the CH1+CH2 key.

In the analog mode, a third trace will appear on the screen. This trace has twice

the amplitude of the Probe Adjust signal. The position of the third trace is affected

by the position controls of both Ch1 and Ch2.

The display mode is indicated in the screen as ’1+2’.

CH1+CH2

CH1 500mV

CH2 500mV

CH1 500mV

CH2 500mV

1+2

CHP

200µs

ch1

CHP MTB

200µs

ch1

MTB

ST5970

Press the ANALOG key to switch to the Digital mode.

Observe that switching to the digital mode turns off the third trace. The ’1+2’

indication disappears.

Press the CH1+CH2 key once again.

Observe that in the digital mode the (CH1+CH2) trace can be used as well.

Simultaneous display of both channels together with the sum of both channels is

not possible in the digital mode.

CH1+CH2

CH1 500mV

CH2 500mV

1+2

CH1 500mV

CH2 500mV

200µs

ch1

MTB

200µs

ch1

ALT

MTB

ST6720

Press the ANALOG key to return to the analog mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 19

VERTICAL

INVERT

The INVERT function in Channel 2 can be used to make it easier to do out-of-

phase signal comparisons. The most common use of the INVERT function is to

obtain the display or make the acquisition of the voltage difference between two

channels. This is done by displaying or capturing the sum of Ch1 and Ch2 as

follows. (This is referred to as the differential mode.)

Using two probes, connect the Probe Adjust signal to Ch1 and Ch2.

Press AUTOSET.

Both Ch1 and Ch2 are now displayed.

Adjust POS and AMPL to get a display as illustrated on the left below.

Press the CH1+CH2 key.

Press the INV key of channel 2.

Since channel 2 is inverted before it is added to channel 1, the result will be CH1-

CH2. This is indicated as ’1-2’ on the screen. The signals on both inputs are the

same, resulting in a straight line at ground level.

(If the line is not straight, this may be an indication that the probes are not correctly

adjusted. When one of the probes is not properly adjusted, the input signals at the

input connectors of the oscilloscope will be unequal. The difference of the two

input signals shows up in the differential mode).

CH1+CH2

INV

CH1 200mV

CH2 200mV

1+2

CHP MTB

CH1 200mV

CH2↓ 200mV

1-2

ch1

200µs

CHP MTB 200µs

ch1

ST5969

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 20

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

VERTICAL MENU

BANDWIDTH LIMITER

The Bandwidth Limiter reduces the bandwidth of the vertical channels to 20 MHz.

This is done by activating a filter in the vertical channels. This feature can be used

both in analog mode and in digital mode to suppress high frequency noise. For

repetitive signals and when in the digital mode, averaging is the preferred

method to reduce noise without limiting the bandwidth.

Press the ’BW LIMIT’ softkey to turn it on.

Observe that the displayed line becomes "thinner" as an indication that the

amount of noise is reduced.

The text ’BWL’ appears in the bottom of the screen to indicate that the function is

active.

Press the ’BW LIMIT’ softkey to turn it off again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 21

VERTICAL MENU

50Ω

The 200 MHz models offer the selection of an input impedance of 50Ω on all input

channels. The EXTTRIG input has no 50Ω possibility. The impedance selection

is a subfunction in VERT MENU.

The 50Ω input impedance is used to obtain a correct impedance to match signal

sources of the same impedance. For interconnection, a coaxial 50Ω cable must

be used. The 50Ω position is indicated on the display with the Lz sign (Low Z =

Low Impedance).

Disconnect all signals from the inputs.

Using a 50Ω coaxial cable, connect a 4 Vpp, 2 kHz signal from a

generator with 50Ω output impedance to channel 1.

Press the AUTOSET key.

Press VERT MENU.

Press the 50Ω CH1 softkey.

VERT MENU

50Ω CH.

OFF

CH1

ST5968

9312

Observe that the displayed signal amplitude changes to half of the original

amplitude. This is caused by the change of the input impedance to 50Ω, which

results in a voltage division between the 50Ω output of the generator and the 50Ω

input of the oscilloscope.

Remove the input signal from CH1.

VERTICAL

PROBE RANGE INDICATOR

Connect the probe again.

Since the 10:1 probe delivered with the instrument is a high

impedance probe, the 50Ω termination is automatically turned off.

At the same time, the sensitivity readout is adjusted automatically

when a 10:1 or 100:1 probe is used. This way you don’t have to

CHx

detector

ST6021

multiply the displayed amplitude by 10 or 100 when you use a Fluke probe with

range indication.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 22

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4.5 HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION AND TRIGGERING

Before starting with the horizontal deflection functions, you must set the

instrument to a predefined state to create a correct start situation.

STANDARD SETTING

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channel 1.

The Probe Adjust signal, now supplied to the input, is a square wave with a lower

level of 0V and a top level of 600 mV.

Press AUTOSET.

TIMEBASE

TIME/DIV

4 periods/cycles of the square wave are displayed on the screen.

ST6839

Press the ’s’ (left) key of the MainTB TIME/DIV key pair a few times.

The more you press the left (’s’) key, the slower the timebase will run. This results

in the number of displayed periods/cycles of the input signal to increase.

Press the ’ns’ (right) key of the MainTB TIME/DIV key pair a few times.

The number of displayed periods/cycles decreases as the timebase speed

increases.

Observe that the timebase speeds are adjustable in steps following a 1-2-5

sequence.

TIME/DIV

MTB 500µs

MTB 100µs

ST6709

Set the timebase to 200 µs.

The signal is displayed with four periods on the screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 23

TIMEBASE

AUTO RANGE

AUTO

RANGE

The AUTO RANGE function continuously adjusts the timebase to a

display of 2 to 6 waveform periods.

Press the AUTO RANGE key.

Observe that the timebase of the signal display changes to display 2 to 6 signal

periods. AUTO TB in the upper right corner of the display indicates that the AUTO

RANGE timebase function is active.

Press one of the TIME/DIV keys.

The AUTO RANGE function is switched off and the AUTO TB indication

disappears.

TIMEBASE

MAIN TB VAR

TIME/DIV

Fine adjustment of timebase speeds between the 1-2-5 steps

can be made by simultaneously pressing the MainTB TIME/DIV

keys.

ST6710

Activate the VAR function by simultaneously pressing the TIME/DIV keys.

Press one key of the MainTB VAR keys.

Observe that the timebase indication is now changing continuously instead of

following the 1-2-5 step sequence.

The VAR timebase readout values are calibrated values. This enables accurate

timing measurements using VAR timebase settings.

Adjust MainTB VAR to 850 µs/div.

Turn off the VAR function by pressing the MainTB TIME/DIV key pair

simultaneously.

Observe that the timebase is set to the nearest step value (1 ms/div).

In the Digital mode, the timebase speeds are determined by an XTal oscillator.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 24

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

TIMEBASE

MAGNIFY

ST6711

MAGNIFY

The displayed signal can be expanded horizontally so that more

signal detail becomes visible. In the analog mode, a 10

magnification is possible and the entire sweep length can be made

visible by turning the X POS control.

Press the right MAGNIFY key.

The text ’MGN’ appears in the bottom of the screen to indicate that the function is

active. Observe that the timebase indication is changed from 1.00 ms/div to

100 µs/div.

MAGNIFY

MGN

100µs

MTB

CH1 200mV

ch1

CH1 200mV

MTB 100µs

ch1

ST6504

Press the ANALOG key to set the scope in the digital mode.

Press the right MAGNIFY key.

^{Observe that the signal expands in}*^1,*^2,*^{4 ... steps to a maximum of 32 times.}

This magnification factor is displayed briefly on the screen.

Set the MAGNIFY to 4.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 25

TIMEBASE

X POS

With X POS the displayed signal is shifted horizontally across the

display.

Turn the X POS control clockwise.

X POS

MAT4199

Observe that a bar graph (

) is displayed.The block on the bar graph

shows which part of the digital trace is displayed as expanded. This block on the

bar graph moves as you use the XPOS control.

Press the RUN/STOP key.

Observe that the MAGNIFY key and the X POS control can still be used after the

acquisition has STOPped. This allows you to look at signal details even after the

signal has been acquired.

Press the RUN/STOP key.

TRIGGERING

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys.

Press AUTOSET.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 26

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

TRIGGER

SOURCE

Press the TRIG 2 key in the CH2 section of the front panel to select

channel 2 as trigger source.

The indication in the lower right hand readout area of the screen now displays ’ch2’.

Observe that the signal is not triggered. The ARM’D LED is on.

Press the TRIG 1 key in the CH1 section of the front panel to select

channel 1 as trigger source.

Observe that the indication has now changed into ’ch1’ and the signal is triggered

again.

TRIG2

TRIG1

CH1

ch2

CH1

ch1

ST5955

TRIGGER

SLOPE

TRIG1

The trigger source selection key is also used to select the trigger slope

between the positive-and negative-going edge of the triggering signal.

Press the TRIG 1 key in the CH1 section of the front panel a second time.

Observe that the signal now starts with the trailing edge instead of a leading edge.

Also the trigger slope symbol in the lower right hand corner of the readout area

indicates a trailing edge.

TRIG1

ch1

ST6025

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 27

TRIGGER

TRIGGER LEVEL

TRIGGER

LEVEL

After each AUTOSET, the trigger level is always clamped within the

signal amplitude range to assure stable triggering on most signals. The

trigger level is adjustable, but it is limited between the minimum

(-100%) and the maximum (+100%) amplitude levels of the signal.

Turn the TRIGGER LEVEL control.

TRIGGER

LEVEL

As you turn the trigger level control, the

trigger level readout in the bottom of the

screen shows the trigger level relative

to the signal amplitude. For example, it

may appear as ’Level=+ 14%’.

LEVEL=+17%

ST6547

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 28

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

TRIGGER

TRIGGER POSITION

TRIGGER

POSITION

Press the ANALOG key to select the digital mode.

Turn the TRIGGER POSITION control counterclockwise.

One of the outstanding capabilities of a Digital Storage Oscilloscope is the ability

to capture and display signal details before the trigger moment.

When you turn the TRIGGER POSITION control counterclockwise, the trigger

point ( ) is shifted to the right. This allows you to look at the signal before the

trigger point. The pretrigger view is displayed in the bottom of the screen, and

calibrated in divisions. The trigger point is indicated on the screen with an arrow.

Pretrigger recording can be adjusted and is limited to one full screen, or -10

divisions.

Turn the TRIGGER POSITION control clockwise.

When the control is rotated clockwise, delay is added. The trigger point shifts to

the left. The delay can be adjusted to a maximum of1000 divisions, so that it is

outside the screen. Positive trigger delay is indicated in seconds or in fractions of

seconds.

Set the delay to 0 with TRIGGER POSITION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 29

TRIGGER

SINGLE SHOT

Make sure the instrument is in the Digital Mode.

Press AUTOSET.

This sets up the scope with the proper amplitude and timebase settings.

Remove the probe tip from the Probe Adjust output.

Turn the TRIGGER POSITION to mid-screen (counterclockwise).

Press the SINGLE key.

This automatically prepares the scope for a single acquisition.

Observe that the screen has been cleared, and that the ARM’D LED is on. This

indicates that the scope is armed and waits for a trigger. The trigger level is

automatically set to .5 divisions (indicated by ’T-’).

Look at the screen and touch the Probe Adjust output with the probe tip.

Observe that the oscilloscope ’runs’ once and that a signal appears on the screen.

The ARM’D LED is turned off. At the moment you touched the Probe Adjust output

with the probe, the scope was triggered. The trigger moment is displayed in the

center of the screen. The left side of the screen displays the part of the signal

before triggering (pretrigger information).

Probe Adjust

T−

ST6505

9303

In SINGLE SHOT also ’Dual Slope’ triggering is possible. See chapter 5

TRIGGER MAIN TB function.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 30

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4.6 DIGITAL ACQUISITION AND STORAGE

This section gives you a short introduction to digital acquisition and storage in

order to provide the basic knowledge and terms. This information is necessary for

you to understand all digital statements in the following sections of the manual.

ANALOG:

INPUT

STAGE

DISPLAY

DIGITAL:

data

signal

INPUT

STAGE

ACQUISITION

MEMORY

ADC

DISPLAY

MEMORY

ST6721

In the analog mode the input signals are directly displayed on the screen.

In the digital mode the channels are applied to the input stage of the digital circuit:

the analog-to-digital convertors (ADC’s). The ADC’s convert the analog signal(s)

into digital data. Depending on the selected timebase speed, this sa2pling and

conversion is done at a rate of up to 200 million samples per second (200 MS/s).

This high sampling rate allows you to observe fast signal variations.

Digital information from the adc is then stored in a Acquisition Memory. The data

acquisition in this memory can be stopped to freeze the trace on the screen. You

can also store (save) complete registers or separate signals into a "background"

memory, called Register Memory. Traces can be stored as long as you like and

can be recalled at any time.

The CombiScopes in this range have a standard memory of 8K. The record length

for each trace is the maximum number of samples divided by the number of

traces. With the standard scope, the memory depth of 8K is available for two

channels. The memory is partitioned so that 1x8K, 2x4K or 4x2K records can be

captured. For maximum update rate, records can be made as short as 512 points.

If the memory expansion option is installed, the record length can be adjusted

between 32K and 512 points.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 31

4.7 ADVANCED VERTICAL FUNCTIONS

All basic functions of the oscilloscope are accessible via direct action front panel

keys.

More advanced functions are easily accessible via the menus behind the menu

initialization keys (keys with their function name in blue text).

STANDARD SETTING

Before continuing with the advanced vertical functions, you must set the

instrument to a predefined state to ensure a correct start situation.

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channel 1.

The Probe Adjust signal, now supplied to the input, is a square wave with a lower

level of 0V and a top level of 600 mV.

Press AUTOSET.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 32

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

ACQUIRE

AVERAGE

The average function averages the input data over a number of successive

acquisitions. The average function is used to reduce the influence of random

noise in the input signal. There is no loss of bandwidth when the average function

is activated, but the signal must be repetitive. The number of samples over which

the average is calculated can be selected by the user.

Use the probe to connect Ch1 to the Probe Adjust output.

Press AUTOSET.

Connect the second probe to channel 2, but do not connect it to a signal!

Press the CH1+CH2 key to add Ch1 and Ch2 together.

Press the mV key of the CH2 AMPL keys so that the noise picked up by

the probe tip of the second probe appears on the CH1+CH2 trace.

Press the AVERAGE key.

For maximum ease of use, the scope offers direct access to the important

average feature.

The text ’Average = 8’ appears in the bottom of the screen to indicate that the

function is active. The default value is 8. The indication changes into ’AVG’.

Observe that the noise on the trace is reduced.

To change the Average constant, press the ACQUIRE key.

Turn the TRACK control clockwise.

The Average factor increases when the TRACK control is turned clockwise.

Observe that this reduces noise on the trace even more.

TRACK

Average=2

AVG

Average=256

AVG

ST6481

Turn the TRACK control counterclockwise so that the Average factor is

8 again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 33

ACQUIRE

ENVELOPE

The ENVELOPE mode records the minimum and the maximum of the signal over

a number of acquisitions.

Press the ACQUIRE key.

Press the ’ENVELOPE’ softkey to turn it on.

ENVELOPE

ENV

ST6480

The AVERAGE mode and the ENVELOPE modes are mutually exclusive.

Observe that AVERAGE is automatically switched off. The text ’ENV’ appears in

the bottom of the screen to indicate that the function is active.

The minimum and maximum of the input signal is stored and becomes visible on

the screen. This process continues until it is turned off by the user.

Turn the POS control of Ch1.

Observe that every time you change the settings of the scope (like trace POS) the

ENVELOPE process automatically starts again.

Press the ’ENVELOPE’ softkey to turn off the ENVELOPE mode.

ACQUIRE

PEAK DETECTION

PEAK DETection automatically catches peak values (up to glitches of 10 ns width)

of the input signal during a single acquisition.

Press the ’PEAK DET’ softkey to turn it on.

The text ’PKD’ appears in the bottom of the screen to indicate that the function is

active. Observe that any glitch on the input signal becomes visible on the screen.

Note:

Regardless of the timebase speed selected, the scope is set to the

highest sample rate, so that glitches up to the sample frequency can be

caught (5 ns at 200 MS/s).

Press the ’PEAK DET’ to turn it off again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 34

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4.8 ADVANCED HORIZONTAL AND TRIGGER

FUNCTIONS

All basic timebase and trigger functions of the oscilloscope are accessible via

direct action front panel keys. More advanced functions are easily accessible via

the menus behind the menu initialization keys (keys with the function in blue text).

STANDARD SETTING

Before continuing with the advanced functions, you must set the instrument to a

predefined state to ensure a correct start situation.

Simultaneously press STATUS and TEXT OFF.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channel 1.

Press the AUTOSET key.

TRIGGER

MODE

Press the TRIGGER key.

On the screen the ’TRIGGER MAIN TB’ menu is displayed. The menu functions

can be selected by pressing the blue softkeys to the right of the screen. The top

softkey selects the trigger mode (’edge’ or ’tv’). The lower part of the menu is

optimized for the selected trigger modes.

Press the first softkey to select ’tv’ trigger mode.

Observe that the lower part of the menu is optimized for tv applications.

Press the first softkey to return to ’edge’.

Note : In the Digital mode, an additional selection is available. This is called

"logic" or "glitch". A full description of the Logic and Glitch triggering

functions can be found in Chapter 5.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 35

TRIGGER

LEVEL

Press the ’level-pp’ softkey to turn it off.

The automatic level detection circuitry is turned off. The trigger level is

no longer clamped within the peak-peak range of the signal. You must

adjust the proper trigger level. While you turn the TRIGGER LEVEL

control, the actual trigger level is displayed in (m)V.

TRIGGER

LEVEL

An indicator ’T-’ is displayed next to the channel identifier when the combination

of trigger coupling and channel input coupling is useful (both ac coupled or both

dc coupled).

When the ’T-’ is within the signal range, a stable display of the signal is obtained.

When proper triggering takes place, the ARM’D LED is off.

Use the TRIGGER LEVEL control to move the indicator (T-) vertically.

T-

TRIGGER

LEVEL

T-

ST6738

When the trigger level indicator (T-) is outside the signal range, triggering is lost.

Because of the nature of the (Probe Adjust) input signal, it appears that only two

lines are drawn. The timebase is not properly triggered, as is indicated by the

ARM’D LED being turned on.

Note:

’T-’ is an indication for reference only. Its position can differ slightly from

the actual trigger level.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 36

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

TRIGGER MODE

TRIGGERED

Press the TB MODE key.

TB MODE

In the screen, the timebase mode (TB MODE) menu appears. ’auto’ is

intensified. With the "auto" mode turned on, the timebase will run free as

soon as no triggering signal is detected, in order to provide a base line.

The ’Auto’ mode works well with most signal that have frequencies of

30 Hz or higher.

Press the softkey next to the ’auto trig single’ function to select ’trig’.

In the triggered mode, a signal is visible only when proper triggering occurs.

Move the indicator (T-) in and out of the signal range.

T−

TRIGGER

LEVEL

T−

ST6737

In the Analog mode, the result is a stable and triggered signal when the indicator

is inside the signal range, and no trace appears on the screen when the indicator

is outside the signal range.

Disabling the ’auto’ function by selecting ’trig’ can be useful for displaying very low

frequency signals. The scope waits for a real trigger before the sweep starts even

if the signal frequency is very low.

In the Digital mode, the same criteria exist for the use of the ’auto’ function and

the ’trig’ function, but there is a difference. When the scope is in the ’trig’ mode

and triggering is lost, the acquisition will stop, but the display will reflect the last

information before the triggering stopped. This may lead you into thinking that the

scope is properly triggered because the display appears to be stable, while in fact,

you are displaying stored information only. Watch the ARM’D LED !

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 37

TRIGGER MODE

ROLL

Press the ANALOG key to select the digital mode.

Press the TB Mode key to enter the TB mode menu

The TB MODE menu is extended with extensive timebase modes. The

differences are as follows:

•

A Roll mode

Selection of ’Real-time only’

Delay by events

Selection of Acquisition length

Press the softkey next to the ’ROLL on off’ function to select ’on’.

The ’ROLL on’ function is now intensified.

Observe that the timebase is automatically set to 200 ms. The trace moves from

the right to the left.

Press the ’STOP ON TRIGGER’ softkey to select ’yes’.

The trace stops when the trigger (in this case the start of the first period) reaches

the left of the screen.

Using the roll mode, you can monitor signals like temperature changes and

chemical processes at low timebase speeds. In this mode the scope operates like

a four-pen plotter. Over 36 hours of events can be recorded in memory and

plotted later.

Unlike a paper and pen plotter, the scope can record glitches as narrow as 5 ns,

and the record can be stopped when a trigger condition is met.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 38

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

TRIGGER

LINE

Connect a sine-wave signal of 4 V/300 Hz to channel 1.

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys.

Press AUTOSET.

Select a timebase speed of 1 ms/div.

Press the TRIGGER key.

Press the softkey next to the function ’ch1 line’ to select ’line’.

When ’line’ is selected, this function is intensified. The line frequency is used as

the trigger source.

Slowly vary the frequency of the sine-wave input signal.

Observe that when the input frequency is close to an integer multiple of the line

frequency, the running sine wave slows down or even stands still. Line triggering

can be used to display signals or signal components that are related to the line

frequency (e.g., hum or power supply ripple).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 39

4.9 MEMORY FUNCTIONS

The next section deals with storing and recalling traces in memory for later use.

Functions related to trace storage and recall are easily accessible via the menus

selection keys labeled ’SAVE" and ’RECALL’.

STANDARD SETTING

Before continuing with the memory functions, you must first set the instrument to

the default setting to ensure a correct start situation.

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channel 1.

Press AUTOSET.

The Probe Adjust signal, now supplied to the input, is a square wave with a lower

level of 0V and a top level of 600 mV.

TRACE STORAGE

CLEAR & PROTECT

SAVE

Press the ANALOG key to select the digital mode.

Press the SAVE key to enter the ’SAVE ACQ TO MEMORY’ menu.

To be sure that all unnecessary stored traces are removed, you first will clear all

memory locations.

Press the ’CLEAR & PROTECT’ softkey.

Press the ’clear all’ softkey.

The scope now displays the confirmation submenu to prevent you from removing

traces you did not want to remove.

Press the ’yes’ confirm softkey.

If any memory locations were protected (’PROTECT ON’ in CLEARS PROTECT

MEMORY submenu), a second confirmation must be given.

Press the ’yes’ confirm softkey again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 40

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

TRACE STORAGE

SAVE

Turn the TRACK control to select the memory location in which to store

the trace data.

Observe that eight memory locations ’m1 to m8’ (or 50 memory locations when

extended memory is installed) scroll through the menu. All locations are marked

with a circle before the memory number.

Select memory location ’m1’.

Press the ’save’ softkey.

The signal is saved in memory location m1.

Observe that the circle before ’m1’ is solid now to indicate that this memory

location is occupied.

Set the MainTB to 500 µs.

Select location ’m2’.

Press the ’save’ softkey.

Set the MainTB to 200 µs/div.

Select location ’m3’.

Press the ’save’ softkey.

Observe that memory locations ’m2’ and ’m3’ are now solid bullets as well.

TRACE STORAGE

CLEAR

You can also clear a memory location.

Select location ’m2’.

Press the ’clear’ softkey.

This clears memory location 2. This is indicated by the open circle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 41

TRACE STORAGE

COPY

A trace can be copied from one memory location to another.

Press the ’COPY’ softkey.

The ’COPY MEMORY’ is now displayed. The source (’FROM’) and destination

(’TO’) memory locations can be selected in this submenu.

Turn the TRACK control to select ’m3’ as source from.

Turn the ∆ control to select ’m2’ as destination to.

Press the ’copy’ softkey.

The contents of ’m3’ have now been copied into ’m2’ without destroying the data

in ’m3’.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 42

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

TRACE STORAGE

RECALL

If you completed all of the previous steps, three memory locations are

occupied by trace information. You can display these stored traces at

any time and in any combination.

Press the RECALL key.

Turn the TRACK control to select ’m1’.

Press the ’DISPLAY on off’ softkey to display m1.

Observe that the stored trace on memory location ’m1’ is displayed and that the

circle before m1 is solid.

An open circle indicates an empty memory location.

A circle with a dot indicates that there is a trace stored, but it is not displayed.

A solid circle indicates trace data in memory are displayed on the screen.

Empty memory locations cannot be displayed.

You can shift traces separately over the screen by means of the ∆ control.

Turn the POSition control.

RECALL

MEMORIES

acq

The live trace shifts.

DISPLAY

on off

CLEAR

DISPLAY

Turn the TRACK

control to select ’m2’.

Press the ’DISPLAY on

off’ softkey to on.

Turn the ∆ control.

Y-POS

−2.30D

∆

POS

trace

∆

ST6722

9303

Observe that the second stored trace shifts.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 43

TRACE STORAGE

SAVING MULTIPLE TRACES

Each memory location can store two channels.

Connect the probe to channel 1.

Press AUTOSET.

Switch on channel 2.

Turn the channel 2 POS control counterclockwise.

The upper trace displays the signal of channel 1, and the lower line represents

channel 2.

Press the SAVE key.

Turn the TRACK control to select memory location ’m1’.

Press the ’save’ softkey to store two traces in ’m1’.

Observe that m1 was already filled, so the confirmation submenu is displayed.

Press the softkey next to ’yes’.

This overwrites memory ’m1’ with the new traces.

TRACE STORAGE

RECALLING MULTIPLE TRACES

Press the RECALL menu key.

The memory location is already preset to the last saved (m1).

Press the ’DISPLAY on off’ softkey so that ’m1’ is displayed.

Turn the ∆ control counterclockwise.

Observe that both traces are displayed and shifted to the lower screen.

Press the softkey next to ’trace register’ to select ’trace’.

Observe that the menu displays both traces of register 1 (m1.1 and m1.2). Both are

filled: m1.1 with the signal of channel 1 and m1.2 with the signal from channel 2.

Turn the TRACK control to select m1.1.

Press the ’DISPLAY on off’ softkey to off.

Observe that the stored trace of channel 1 is not displayed any more.

Press the ’CLEAR DISPLAY’ softkey to clear all stored traces before

continuing to the next section.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 44

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4.10 CURSORS FUNCTIONS

CURSORS

∆

TRACK

Cursors are provided to make fast and accurate amplitude

and time measurements. These can be done in digital

mode as well as in analog mode.

ST6171

9303

The analog mode of the oscilloscope is often used to accurately display complex

waveforms, such as in AM, FM, and Video.

The digital mode will often be the preferred operating mode for single accuracies

which have to be studied or analyzed.

When operating in digital mode, the cursors are always set to the optimum place

for that particular measurement and the readout is directly displayed on the

screen.

This is the fastest and easiest way for most of the measurements .

But for measurements on very complex signals with different waveforms in a

trace, the analog cursor measurements gives you a very helpful tool to find your

measurement.

STANDARD SETTING

Start with the standard setting. This ensures you have the correct start condition.

Press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys simultaneously.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channel 1.

The Probe Adjust signal now supplied to the input is a square wave with a lower

level of 0V and a top level of 600 mV.

Press the AUTOSET key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 45

CURSORS

ON/OFF

There are two sets of cursors : amplitude cursors and time cursors. Amplitude

cursors are two horizontal lines, and Time cursors are two vertical lines. The

dashed lines are referred to as reference cursors and the dotted lines are referred

to as delta (∆) cursors.

Cursor measurements can be made in both operating modes of the instrument.

Amplitude and time cursors can be displayed at the same time.

Press the ANALOG key to set the scope in mode.

Press the CURSORS key to enter the cursors menu.

The menu is now displayed. Time cursors (’||’) are selected by default. In the

digital mode, two ’x’s mark the actual measuring point where the cursors intersect

with the signal. In the analog mode these ’x’ indicators are not available.

CURSORS

TIME

Using the TRACK and ∆ controls, you can adjust the position of the cursors. The

time and amplitude difference between the cursors is read in the top of the screen.

Cursor readout parameters can be

changed and are selected via the

CURSORS

’READ OUT’ softkey.

on off

TRACK

Turn the TRACK control and

observe that both cursors

move.

ch1

ch1: ∆T= 354µs ∆V= 584mV

Turn the Delta (∆) control

and observe that only the

delta cursor moves.

READOUT

ST6730

9303

MTB 200us

CH1 200mV

ch1

∆

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 46

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

CURSORS

VOLT

Use the softkeys, to select the amplitude cursors (’=’ intensified).

Two amplitude cursors will appear in the display.

The menu permits the channel to be selected for which the amplitude cursors

apply.

When channel 1 is the only channel displayed, ’ch1’ is the only selection.

CURSORS

on off

Turn the TRACK

control to move both

cursors, and turn the

Delta (∆) control to

move only the ∆

cursor.

ch1

∆

s ∆V=360mV

ch1: ∆T=

TRACK

READOUT

ST6731

9303

MTB 200us

CH1 200mV

ch1

CURSORS

AMPLITUDE & TIME

Amplitude and Time cursors can be displayed at the same time. When both

amplitude and time cursors are displayed, you must select which cursors are

affected by the TRACK and ∆ controls. This selection is made by toggling the

softkey ’CONTROL’.

Channel selection applies only to the voltage cursors. The time cursor always

applies to all channels.

To use both types of cursors at the same time, do the following:

Press the softkey next to ’= || #’ so that ’#’ is intensified.

Press the CONTROL softkey so that ’=’ is intensified.

Turn the TRACK control and observe that only the amplitude cursors

move.

Press the CONTROL softkey so that ’||’ is intensified.

Turn the TRACK control and observe that only the time cursors move.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 47

CURSORS

READOUT

Press the softkey next to ’READOUT’.

CURSORS

READOUT

∆T 1/∆T

∆T-ratio

ph T-trg

The ’CURSOR READOUT’

selection menu for horizontal and

vertical measurements is now

displayed. You can make the

following selections from this menu:

∆T, 1/∆T, ∆T-ratio, T-trg and phase

for time measurements.

∆V

V1&V2

∆V-ratio

ch1: ∆T= 460s ∆V= 600mV

RETURN

∆V, V1, V2, ∆V-ratio for voltage

measurements.

ST6732

9312

∆T is the time difference between the time cursors. The readout is in seconds (s)

or fractions of seconds.

1/∆T results in the inverted value of the time difference, and is displayed in Hz.

When the time cursors are set exactly one period apart this represents the

frequency of the signal.

∆T-ratio allows for a relative measurement of two cursor readings. It is displayed

as a percentage.

Phase is used to measure a phase difference between two signals, or to

determine the phase of a detail within one signal.

T-trg gives the timedifference between the cursors and the trigger point.

∆V is the voltage difference between the voltage cursors (readout: ∆V=...V).

V1, V2 displays the absolute voltages for each voltage cursor in relation to ground

(readout: V1=Vreference, V2=Vdelta).

∆V-ratio allows for a relative measurement of two cursor readings. It is displayed

as a percentage.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 48

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

CURSORS READOUT

∆T-RATIO/PHASE

First, the reference distance between the two cursors is set. This then is set to

100 % (360°) by pressing the ∆T=100 % (360°) softkey. Changing the distance

between the cursors now results in a % (°) reading of the reference.

Press the softkey next to ∆T until ∆T-ratio (phase) is intensified.

Set the time cursors to be exactly one signal period apart.

Press the softkey next to ∆T=100% (360°).

In the cursor readout line of the screen, the value for ∆T is now ’∆T=100%’

(∆T=360°)

Observe that the 100% (360°) reference does not change when the TRACK

control is turned.

100%

50%

ch1: ∆T=100% ∆V=600mV

ch1: ∆T=50% ∆V=600mV

ST6733

TRACK

∆

TRACK

∆

∆T=100%

Adjust the cursors to a distance of half a signal period.

Now the ∆T in the readout area will read ’∆T= 50%’ (∆T=180°)

This is the way to use the cursors for duty cycle measurements.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 49

4.11 MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS

When operating in the analog mode, you can use the cursors to measure

amplitude and time data.

When operating in the digital mode, the scope has an extensive set of fully

automated amplitude and time measurement functions. You can select two

measurements to be performed simultaneously. These measurements are

updated automatically, so that when signals change, the measured values

automatically changed at the same time. The read- outs are displayed in the

upper section of the screen.

STANDARD SETTING

Start with the standard setting.This ensures a correct start.

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channel 1.

The Probe Adjust signal now supplied to the input is a square wave with a lower

level of 0V and a top level of 600 mV.

Press AUTOSET.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 50

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

MEASURE

MEAS1-PKPK

MEASURE

Press the ANALOG key to select the digital mode.

Press the MEASURE key.

The displayed menu gives access to the two measurements MEAS 1 and

MEAS 2. Each measurement can be independently turned on and off. In this

menu, you can select the measurement in MEAS 1 and MEAS 2 function.

Observe that the measurements are linked to the active channel. The two default

measurements are ’pkpk’ and ’freq’.

Press the second softkey to turn MEAS1 to ’on’.

The screen automatically displays the result of the peak-to-peak measurement:

’ch1: pkpk= ....mV’.

Press the softkey next to ’MEAS1’.

The menu displays the ’SELECT MEAS 1" submenu. You can choose from three

main measurements: volt, time, or delay. The lower part of the menu optimizes to

the selected main measurement.

The actual type of measurement is selected by using the ’TRACK’ control. The

following voltage measurements are available : dc, root- mean square, minimum

peak, maximum peak, peak-to-peak, low level, high level.

The following time measurements are available : frequency, period, pulse width,

rise time, fall time, duty cycle.

The ’delay’ measurements include the time delay between leading or trailing

edges between any two channels or traces. (Channel or trace must be on the

display)

MEASURE

MEAS1-RMS

Select ’volt’ measurements.

Turn the TRACK control to select ’rms’.

Observe that the screen displays the result of the rms measurement: ’ch1 rms = ....V’.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 51

MEASURE

MEAS 2-FREQ

Press the ’RETURN’ softkey to return to the ’MEASURE’ menu.

Turn on MEAS 2.

MEAS 2 performs a frequency measurement on the same signal. The screen

displays this result as : ’ch1 freq= ....kHz’.

Remove the Probe Adjust signal from channel 1

Because of the absence of an input signal, no frequency can be measured. This

results in the display ’ch1 freq= ----Hz’.

MEASURE

DELAY

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channels 1 and 2.

Turn on channel 2.

Shift the signal on channel 1 to the upper half of the screen and the

signal on channel 2 to the lower half of the screen.

Press the softkey next to MEAS1.

The SELECT MEAS1 submenu is displayed.

Press the first softkey to select ’delay’

SELECT

MEAS 1

The delay measurement is

performed automatically.

Observe that the first

volt

time

delay

measurement is linked to the

channel 1 signal (on positive

slope) and the second is listed to

the channel 2 signal (on

negative slope).

ch1

ch2

ch1

ch2

∆

1−

2−

RETURN

The delay is displayed in the top

corner of the screen

’ch1: del = .... µs’.

ST6723

9303

DELAY

Press the RETURN softkey to return to the MEASURE menu.

This measurement is very useful when you must compensate unequal cable delays.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 52

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

MEASURE

CURSOR LIMIT

With cursor limited measurements it is possible to perform measurements on a

part of the waveform.

Press the softkey next to CURSOR LIMIT& STATIST.

Set CURSOR LIMITED to ’yes’.

Turn the ∆ control to reduce the area between the cursors.

Notice that the measurement result shows dashes when the area between the

cursors gets too small.

Press the RETURN softkey to return to the MEASURE menu.

Turn off the measurements MEAS1 and MEAS2.

Disconnect the probe from channel 2 before continuing to the next

section.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 53

MEASURE

TOUCH, HOLD & MEASURE ™

The probes delivered with the oscilloscope offer a unique and innovative way to

perform a number of functions directly from a push button mounted on the side of

the probe. One of these functions is called ’TOUCH HOLD and MEASURE ™’.

The TOUCH HOLD & MEASURE ™ function is a very quick way to instantly

display the four main measurements. You need only one single push button. This

push button is located nearest to the place of measurement on the probe;

therefore, this button is referred to as COMMAND switch.

Before using the COMMAND

switch on the probe, you must

first adapt the instrument’

reaction to this function. This is

done in the ’UTILITY >>

PROBE’ menu.

COMMAND

ST6837

9303

The procedure to set up for TOUCH, HOLD and MEASURE ™ is:

Press the UTILITY key.

Press the softkey labeled ’PROBE’.

Select ’q.meas’.

Press the COMMAND push button on the probe.

Observe that the screen displays the signal frequency and amplitude dc voltage

level (dc, pkpk, rms, and freq) measurements.

The probe COMMAND switch gives you the fastest and easiest method of

trouble-shooting. You can keep your eyes on the circuit to be measured without

having to move your eyes to press a push button on the scope.

NOTE: The probe COMMAND switch can also be used for other functions.

Programming of other functions is done in the UTILITY menu

(see section 5)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 54

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4.12 PROCESSING FUNCTIONS

MATH

Most oscilloscopes, including most Digital Storage Oscilloscopes, limit

their capabilities to the display of amplitude (in volts), versus time.

In addition to those traditional oscilloscope functions, this range offers capabilities

to mathematically change the contents of each memory location. To do so, the

functions under ’MATHEMATICS’ allow you to calculate new waveforms from

existing other traces serving as input data.

If your oscilloscope is equipped with the MATH + option, more functions are

available than the ones described in this section. Additional information on the

additional functions is described in a separate manual.

The section below describes the mathematical functions implemented in the

standard oscilloscopes versions.

Two mathematical functions MATH 1 and MATH 2 can be used as two

independent processes. They can be used in series or in parallel.

The result of MATH 1 is always stored in memory location ’m1’.

The result of MATH 2 is always stored in memory location ’m2’.

When used for mathematical functions, existing memory locations are

overwritten. (Use the ’Copy’ function to save important traces in another memory

location, before using the mathematical functions.)

STANDARD SETTING

Start with the standard setting to ensure that you have the correct start condition.

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channel 1.

Press AUTOSET.

The Probe Adjust signal now supplied to the input is a square wave with a lower

level of 0V and a top level of 600 mV.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 55

MATHEMATICS

FILTER

Press the ANALOG key to select the digital mode.

Press the MATH menu key.

The MATH menu is displayed on the screen. Observe that MATH 1 is the default.

Press the softkey next to MATH 1 to enter the MATH 1 submenu.

This menu is used to select one of the four mathematic functions: ’add, sub, mul,

filter’.

Observe that the default process for MATH 1 is the ’filter’ function. Typical use of

the digital low-pass filter is to suppress noise even after a (single shot) acquisition

has to be captured.

You can select between the acquired signal or a stored signal to be the source.

The trace information in the source trace is mathematically filtered by a low-pass

filter.

The resulting trace is automatically stored in memory location ’m1 and displayed

on the screen.

Turn the TRACK control to select ’acq’.

Press the ’ENTER’ softkey.

Press the key next to ’on off’ to turn MATH 1 on.

TRACK

3dB=4.25kHz

MTB 200µs

3dB=11.2kHz

MTB 200µs

CH1 200mV

ch1

200mV

CH1

ch1

ST6745

Turn the TRACK control to change the cut-off frequency.

Switch off MATH 1 again before continuing to the next section.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 56

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

MATHEMATICS

MULTIPLY

You can activate a second process MATH 2. This way, two processes can run at

the same time.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channel 1 and channel 2 and turn on

both channels.

Press the ’MATH 2’ softkey in the MATH menu.

The menu displays the MATH 2 functions. MATH 2 offers the same functions and

parameters as MATH 1.

For MATH 2 the default parameter is ’mult’.

Using ’MULT’ means that two selected traces are multiplied together and that the

result is stored in ’m2’.

Press the softkey next to MATH 2 to enter the MATH 2 submenu.

Observe that the submenu is now optimized for the multiplying process. You can

select between all active traces or memory locations to be the source traces.

Turn the TRACK control to select ch1.

Turn the ∆ control to select ch2.

Press the ENTER softkey to return to the main menu.

Press the softkey next to ’on off’ to turn MATH 2 on.

The multiplied trace of channel 1 and channel 2 is instantly displayed on the

screen. At this time the resulting trace is stored in memory location ’m2’.

One example of this process is to multiply voltage across a component and

current through that component to find dissipated instantaneous power.

Switch MATH 2 off again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 57

4.13 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS

When operating in the analog mode, you can set the scope to display XY displays

by selecting ’X DEFLECTION’ mode. In this mode the horizontal deflection is

obtained from one of the input signals, while the analog timebase generator is

turned off.

In the digital mode the ’DISPLAY’ menu is extended.

STANDARD SETTING

Start with the standard setting. This ensures that you have the correct start.

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channel 1.

Press AUTOSET.

The Probe Adjust signal now supplied to the input is a square wave with a lower

level of 0V and a top level of 600 mV.

ANALOG DISPLAY

X-DEFL

In X-DEFLection mode, ’XY’ displays are used for direct comparisons of two or

more signals : one as a function of one or more others.

Vertical deflection is selected in the same way as for ’normal’ displays using the

timebase. Horizontal deflection is obtained by selecting one of the sources as

displayed in the X-DEFL menu on the screen.

Connect a sine wave of approx 300 Hz to channel 2.

Press AUTOSET.

Observe that the scope displays the two traces on the screen in analog mode.

Press the DISPLAY key to enter the analog DISPLAY MENU.

Press the X-DEFL softkey to enter the X-DEFL sub menu.

Press the ’on off’ softkey so that ’on’ is intensified.

Two vertical lines appear on the screen.

The menu now displays the source for the X-axis intensified (’X=ch1’).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 58

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

The signal on channel 1 is a square wave. Consequently,

there will be only two vertical levels to display.

The signal on channel 2 is a sine wave, which is now

displayed as a function of the square wave on channel 1.

CH1 200mV

CH2 1.00V

X=ch1

Press the X SOURCE softkey so that ’line’ is intensified.

Turn off channel 1.

ST6739

Horizontal deflection is now obtained from the line voltage. On the screen channel

2 (sine-wave) is displayed against the line voltage. The signals on the horizontal

deflection (line) and the vertical deflection (ch2) have different frequency.

Vary the frequency of the generator to get an almost stable picture.

The displayed figure is called a Lissajous figure. This lissajous figure has 5 (60 Hz

line) or 6 (50 Hz line) tops depending on the line frequency. The number tops

multiplied by the horizontal (line) frequency results in the frequency of the vertical

signal.

ch1

ch2

ch3

ch4

line

CH2

X=lne

CH2

X=lne

50Hz

60Hz

ST6006

If the generator is equal or close to the line frequency, the Lissajous figure is an

ellips whose shape depends on the phase difference. Measuring phase difference

using the X Deflection mode is one of the typical applications for this mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 59

DIGITAL DISPLAY

X versus Y

Similar to the analog mode, the digital mode allows you to display one trace as a

function of another.

The source for vertical direction (Y) is selected by the TRACK control. It can be

the acquired trace or a saved track in a memory location (e.g., m3).

For horizontal direction (X) you can choose from an active channel signal saved

in memory (e.g., m3.1).

Press the ANALOG key to select the digital mode.

Press the DISPLAY key.

Press the X vs Y softkey.

Press the ’on off’ softkey to turn it on.

Press the X SOURCE softkey to select ’ch1’.

2−

Now two horizontal lines (Ch 1 against Ch 2) are

displayed. Horizontal deflection is determined by the

amplitude of the sine wave.

X= CH1 200mV

CH2 50mV

ST6724

9303

The X vs Y submenu displays the selection menu for the X and Y sources.

Observe that you can select the Y source (REGISTER) using the TRACK control.

Use the softkeys to choose the X source.

Remove the signal from channel 2.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 60

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

DIGITAL DISPLAY

VERT MAGNIFY

In the digital mode, the displayed signal can be expanded vertically after it has

been captured. This allows you to look to signal details. Please note that the

magnified representation of the signal has the same resolution as the originally

acquired signal.

Press the ANALOG key to select the digital mode.

Press AUTOSET.

Remove the probe tip from the Probe Adjust output.

Turn the TRIGGER POSITION control to mid screen (counterclockwise).

Press the SINGLE key to prepare the scope for a single acquisition.

Touch the probe tip to the Probe Adjust output.

The scope ’runs’ once and a signal appears on the screen.

Press the DISPLAY key.

Press the VERT MAGNIFY softkey to turn it on.

Turn the TRACK control clockwise.

The signal magnifies a maximum of 32 times. The magnification factor is

displayed in the DISPLAY menu. At the same time the vertical deflection in the

bottom text area reflects the expanded deflection factor.

Use the TRACK control to adjust VERT MAGNIFY to 8.

DISPLAY

Observe that you can observe

the signal in more detail. It has

the same vertical resolution as

when captured. Notice the adc

noise being displayed.

WINDOWS

on off

VERT

MAGNIFY

T−

X vs Y

Vertical magnify is very useful

when you want to observe a

signal detail with very high

resolution. You can use it in

combination with the horizontal

MAGNIFY function.

TEXT

dots

linear

sine

ST6725

9303

CH1 25.0mV

MTB 200µs 5.00dv ch1

Note:

If you want to adjust the displayed position of the magnified trace, you

must enter the Recall menu, and use the ∆ control to make any

adjustments to the Y position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 61

DIGITAL DISPLAY

INTERPOLATION

Interpolation is a mathematical way to calculate displayed dots between actually

captured signal samples. Interpolated displays help in the recognition of trace

waveforms, even when the number of samples is too low to render an accurate

representation of the signal.

Use the bottom key in the DISPLAY menu to control whether or not interpolation

is used. You can choose between dots, linear, and sine interpolation.

The default is linear interpolation. Linear interpolation fills the spaces between

each sample on the screen with additional dots that are interpolated linearly. This

is used to obtain a smoothed display.

Use the MAGNIFY keys to set the horizontal magnify to 4.

Turn the X POS control clockwise to display the adc noise only.

The noise is displayed as continuous trace. This is because the space between

the samples is interpolated with additional dots and this filled with a continuous

line.

ST6736

LINEAR

DOTS

SINE

Press the bottom softkey to select ’dots’.

Observe that only the sample dots are displayed and the space between the dots

is blanked.

Press the bottom softkey to select ’sine’.

Observe that the trace is smoothed again, but because of a different calculation,

it is ’roundedoff’ as compared to the linear interpolation.

Sine interpolation is recommended for signals primarily containing sine waves or

combinations.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 62

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

DIGITAL DISPLAY

WINDOWS

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channels 1 and 2.

Press AUTOSET.

The screen displays the two Probe Adjust signals in the

center of the screen.

Press the TEXT OFF key, to turn off the bottom

text.

Switch on the channels 3 and 4, when present.

The screen displays two or four traces now.

Press the DISPLAY key.

Press the key next to ’WINDOWS’ to ’on’.

The screen is automatically divided into two windows of

four or four of two divisions each. Each window displays

one trace. Observe that the amplitude of the signal has

been adjusted to the actual window space.

ST6740

Turn the Y POS control of channel 2 and observe that you can shift the

trace within, but not outside the window.

Use the window function for logic applications where amplitude accuracy is less

important than clear timing comparisons.

Switch the WINDOWS off again.

Disconnect the probe from channel 2 before continuing to the next

section.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 63

4.14 DELAYED TIMEBASE

DELAY

The Delayed Timebase (DEL’DTB) has two basic

functions:

DELAYED TIME BASE

DTB

TIME/DIV ns

ST6719

9303

•

To magnify and display any detail of the signal displayed with the main

timebase.

To permit more accurate timing measurements.

STANDARD SETTING

To start from a predefined state, you must recall the standard front setting.

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT

OFF keys.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channel 1.

Shift the trace to the upper half of the screen

as indicated.

CH1 500mV

MTB 1ms

ch1

ST6715

DELAYED TIMEBASE

MainTB and Del’dTB

DELAYED

Press the Delayed Timebase DTB key to enter

the DELAYED TIMEBASE menu.

Press the ’DEL’D TB on off’ softkey to turn on

the Delayed Timebase.

TIME BASE

DEL’D TB

on off

MAIN TB

on off

starts

trig’d

TRACE

SEP

The main timebase trace and delayed timebase

trace are displayed simultaneously.

MTB 1ms

DTB 0.1ms 4.300ms

ch1

CH1 500mV

ST6716

The upper trace is the Main Timebase trace. The Main Timebase trace shows an

intensified portion. It may be necessary to adjust the trace intensity with the

TRACE INTENSITY control to the left of the screen.

The lower trace is the Delayed Timebase trace. This represents the intensified

part of the upper trace.

Since all primary functions have dedicated keys and controls on the front panel,

the menu can now be turned off.

Press the TEXT OFF button to turn off the menu.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 64

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

DELAYED TIMEBASE

DELAY

Use the DELAY control to select the start of intensified part of the signal in the

upper trace. The intensified part acts like a window over the Main Timebase trace.

DELAY

MTB 1.00ms

DTB 100µs 2.675ms

CH1

MTB 1.00ms

DTB 100µs 6.225ms

CH1

CH1 500mV

ST6726

DELAYED TIMEBASE

TIMEBASE

Press either key of the Del’dTB TIME/DIV keys.

When you press the left key, the intensified part of this signal gets longer. More

periods of the signal are displayed on the Delayed Timebase. When you press the

right key, the intensified part of this signal gets shorter and fewer periods of the

signal are displayed on the Del’dTB. This way you can select any small portion of

a signal and capture and display it with a higher resolution.

TIME/DIV ns

MTB 1.00ms

DTB 500us

MTB 1.00ms

DTB 50.0µs

ST6727

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 65

DELAYED TIMEBASE

TRACE SEP

The traces displayed by the Main Timebase and Delayed Timebase can be

separated with TRACE SEP.

If the DELAYED TIMEBASE menu is activated, you will see the T symbol next

to the TRACE SEP text. The T indicates that the TRACK control can be used to

adjust the trace separation.

Turn the TRACK control and observe that the DTB trace shifts.

dtb

TRACK

ST6728

DELAYED TIMEBASE

TRIGGER

Using the Delayed Timebase (Del’d) to select, capture, and display a small portion

of the Main Timebase display results in a magnification of the intensified part.

Depending on the ratio between the MainTB and Del’dTB settings, this

magnification can be very significant.

If the input signal contains jitter or any other form of timing instability, this jitter will

be magnified in the same ratio. This can be so much, that the display becomes

unusable. To address such a problem, the Delayed Timebase (Del’dTB) can be

made to trigger on the input signal after the delay time has passed.

Start with the STANDARD SETUP.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to the

Channel 1 input.

Simultaneously press the STATUS and

TEXT OFF keys.

DELAYED

TIME BASE

DEL’D TB

on off

MAIN TB

on off

starts

trig’d

TRACE

Switch channel 1 to AC coupling ( ).

Shift the trace to the upper half of the screen.

Press the Delayed Timebase (DTB) key to

enter the DELAYED TIMEBASE menu.

Turn on the Delayed Timebase.

SEP

LEVEL

+0V

∆

ac dc

lf-rej

hf-rej

MTB 1ms

DTB 0.1ms >4.300ms ch1

ch1

CH1 500mV

ST6717

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 66

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

The third softkey in the menu is labeled ’starts/trig’d’. ’Starts’ is highlighted as

default. This is an indication that the Delayed Timebase starts immediately after

the delay time has passed. For most signals, the ’starts’ mode can be used.

Press the softkey to select the TRIG’D mode.

When the triggered mode is selected for the Del’dTB, the start of the Del’dTB is

postponed until the first trigger occurs after the delay time. A valid trigger depends

on the proper setting of the trigger source, slope and level.

The delayed timebase trigger source and slope can be selected with the same

TRIG 1, TRIG 2, TRIG 3, TRIG 4 or EXT TRIG buttons as are used for Main

Timebase triggering.

When the DELAYED TIMEBASE is active, operation of the Del’dTB triggering is

similar to that of the Main Timebase trigger source and slope.

In the lower right hand corner of the screen, the delayed timebase trigger readout

is displayed under the readout for the Main Timebase triggering.

Press the TRIG 1 key in the CH1 section a few times.

Observe that the trigger slope for the Delayed Timebase changes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 67

DELAYED TIMEBASE

TRIGGER LEVEL

Just as is the case for Main Timebase triggering, proper triggering of the Delayed

Timebase depends on the selection of the proper trigger level.

The ∆ symbol in the Delayed Timebase trigger menu indicates the ∆ control to be

used to adjust the trigger level.

If the coupling for the vertical channel and the triggering are the same, a trigger

level indicator is visible (D-).

If you have set up for triggered operation of the Del’dTB as described in the

previous section, and the Del’dTB trace is not displayed, the trigger level needs

adjustment.

Adjust the ∆ control until the Del’dTB signal is visible.

D-

∆

D-

ST6729

D−: DTB TRIGGER LEVEL INDICATOR

DELAYED TIMEBASE

COUPLING

The Del’dTB permits the same trigger coupling selection as for the MainTB (ac,

dc, LF-rej, HF-rej). The level indication ’D-’ (for Del’dTB) is present only when the

combination of the Del’dTB trigger coupling and the input coupling is useful.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 68

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4.15 HARD COPY FACILITIES

The oscilloscope offers the capabilities to make a hard copy of the screen

information on a printer or a plotter. The hard copy can include the recorded

waveform(s), the relevant scope settings, trace identification, cursors,

measurement results and screen graticule.

Before you are able to print or plot a hard copy of the information on the CRT it is

necessary to make some preparations:

•

Oscilloscope and printer/plotter must be connected through a suitable cable.

The oscilloscope and the printer/plotter must be set up to the correct interface

parameters.

All setup actions are done in the UTILITY menu.

SET STANDARD

First set the instrument to the standard setting.

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys.

Connect the Probe Adjust signal to channel 1.

The Probe Adjust signal, now supplied to the input, is a square wave with a lower

level of 0V and a top level of 600 mV.

Press AUTOSET.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 69

UTILITY

PRINT SETUP

The oscilloscope must first be set to the correct interface parameters. Your

instrument is always equipped with an RS 232 interface as standard. The

following procedure describes how to set up the oscilloscope to use a printer

through the RS 232 interface.

Press the ANALOG key to select the digital mode.

Press the UTILITY key.

Press the softkey ’PRINT&PLOT&CLK’.

Select ’print’ with the first softkey.

Using the TRACK control, you can choose from the following models or

emulations: HP 2225, FX 80, LQ 1500, HPLASER and HP540 Deskjet.

Turn TRACK to select the printer you wish to use.

Press the softkey next to ’RS 232/IEEE’ to select RS 232.

The RS 232 settings of the oscilloscope and the printer must match. To set the

RS 232 parameters do the following:

Press RETURN to go to the UTILITY main menu.

Press the ’RS 232 SETUP’ softkey.

If the IEEE option is present, the RS 232 SETUP softkey is reached via the

REMOTE SETUP softkey.

Set the RS 232 parameters (baud rate, data bits, parity, connector type,

and XON/XOFF).

Press the RETURN softkey.

If you don’t know what to choose, the mostly used "default" parameters are:

9600, 8, N, 3wire, XON/XOFF=ON.

To set up the layout of the printer hard copy.

Press the LAYOUT softkey.

Set the layout parameters (grid, paper length and trace info).

Press the RETURN softkey.

Now you are ready to make the hard copy.

Press the HARD COPY key.

The printer starts printing.

Observe that the screen displays : ’HARDCOPY BUSY : ..% DONE’ to indicate

the progress of the printing.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 70

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

The preceding section describes the setup of a printer using the RS 232 interface.

If you wish to use an IEEE-488 equipped printer, all steps are the same, except

for the RS 232 setup.

9303

UTILITY

PLOT SETUP

For a hard copy with a plotter, please refer to the previous section on how to set

up the oscilloscope to be used with a printer. Instead of selecting a printer, you

can select a plotter from the following models or emulations : HP7440, HP7550,

HP7475A, HP7470A, HPGL (= standard HPGL), PM8277 and PM8278.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 71

4.16 AUTOSET AND SETUP UTILITIES

This oscilloscope has a number of utilities that assist you to quickly get to the

setup you need.

One utility is the SET STANDARD utility to set the oscilloscope to a factory-

defined, known state.

The most frequently used utility will be AUTOSET. AUTOSET is user

programmable as outlined below.

SET STANDARD

Simultaneously press the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys.

The standard setting feature resets all functions to a predefined state. At this time it

must be used to ensure that the standard setup condition applies before proceeding.

SET STANDARD also resets the autoset function to the standard autoset condition.

AUTOSET

STANDARD

AUTO SET

The AUTOSET function automatically sets all relevant functions of the

oscilloscope as they apply to the input signal. This includes the

selection of channels, input sensitivity, timebase setting, trigger

source, trigger slope, and trigger level for an optimum trace.

Connect the Probe Adjust output to channel 1.

Press the AUTOSET key.

The result is a stable display with a number of signal periods. The amplitude is

well within the display range. In this example the Probe Adjust signal is displayed

with four periods/cycles on the screen and an amplitude of three divisions. This

operating mode is referred to as AUTOSET after the SET STANDARD.

STATUS

AUTO SET

TEXT OFF

ch1

MTB 1.00ms

CH1 500mV

ch1

200mV

MTB 200µs

CH1

ST6734

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 72

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

AUTOSET

USER PROGRAMMABLE

The AUTOSET function can also be programmed so that certain functions switch

to a predefined position after an AUTOSET.

USERPROG allows the user to customize the AUTOSET function for specific

applications.

Example: To program the AUTOSET function for dc coupling of the inputs, do

the following:

Press the UTILITY key.

Press the softkey labeled ’AUTOSET’.

Select ’userprog’

Press the ’VERT >’ softkey; select ’dc’, and press RETURN.

Press the AUTOSET key.

The Probe Adjust signal is now displayed as dc coupled, instead of ac coupled as

would be the case after a STANDARD AUTOSET.

SETUPS

All settings of all controls can be stored in any of 10 memory locations.

This is a useful feature when performing routine tasks involving complex

setup procedures. Rather than changing all parameters to go from one

measurement to another, the oscilloscope can recall even the most complex

settings combinations with the touch of one button.

The SETUPS key is used to store and recall previously defined instrument

settings.

First clear all memory locations.

Press the SETUPS key.

Press the ’CLEAR&PROTECT’ softkey.

Press the ’clear all’ softkey.

Press the ’yes’ confirm softkey.

Example: Set the attenuator to 500 mV/div, and set the timebase to 500 µs/div.

Position the trace in the bottom of the screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 73

This setup can be saved in memory as follows:

Turn the TRACK control until memory location ’s7’ is selected.

Press the softkey ’save’.

FRONTS

recall

undo

The actual setting of the front is

now stored in memory location

’s7’. The indication in front of

memory location number ’s7’

changes from an open circle to a

closed circle.

save

TEXT

CLEAR &

PROTECT

ST6735

9303

MTB 500µs

ch1

CH1 500mV

To recall a previously stored setting :

Press the AUTOSET key.

The signal is displayed again with an amplitude of three divisions and with four

periods.

Press the SETUPS key.

Use the TRACK control to select the same front number ’s7’ as in the

previous example.

Press the softkey next to ’recall’.

The stored settings are recalled and the trace is displayed in the same way as

when the setup was stored.

A STANDARD FRONT setup can be recalled at any time by pressing the STATUS

and TEXT OFF keys simultaneously.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 - 74

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

SETUP

TEXT LABEL

In the setup menu each stored setups can be given a label of user defined text.

This is done in the submenu TEXT of the SETUP menu. The cursor controls are

used for editing text. The TRACK control is used as "cursor", The ∆ control is used

for selecting the character.

SETUP

RECALL A SEQUENCE

You can create a sequence of setups by storing setups to successive locations

(e.g. s1, s2, s3) and clearing the next location (e.g. s4). The AUTOSET key then

can be programmed to step through this sequence. This is very useful for semi

automated manufacturing. To program the AUTOSET to be used for STEP-TO-

NEXT-SETUP-IN-THE-SEQUENCE select the UTILITY >> AUTOSET submenu

and select setups.

AUTOCAL

The AUTOCAL function is used for fine adjustment of the oscilloscope’s input,

trigger, and timebase circuitry. This allows you to achieve the high accuracies

specified for this instrument, even under extreme environmental conditions like

very high or very low temperatures.

When the oscilloscope is always kept under the same environmental conditions

(e.g. in a workshop or lab.), it is sufficient to perform this AUTOCAL once every

month.

It is recommended that you perform an AUTOCAL after the instrument has

warmed up.

To perform an AUTOCAL :

Press the CAL key for at least 2 seconds.

The calibration is fully automatic and takes about 4 minutes.

For purposes of full traceability, an official calibration in a fully equipped and

traceable calibration laboratory should be done once a year or after every 2000

hours of use.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THE INSTRUMENT

4 - 75

OTHER FEATURES

You are now an experienced user of this Fluke oscilloscope.

The following features were not covered by this step-by-step introduction:

Trigger and ground level indicators

TV and HDTV trigger modes and line selection

Trigger filters

State pattern and glitch triggering (Glitch only in 2 ch. models)

Event counter delay

Record length selection 8k/4k/2k/512 samples

User text

Intensity ratio Main/Delayed Timebase

Probe correction

Beep and click signals

Noisy signal triggering

Confidence check

Most of these functions can be operated via the UTILITY menu.

For further information on all of these features, refer to the cross- reference index

and Chapter 5. This chapter describes all oscilloscope functions in alphabetical

order.

This oscilloscope has been designed to give you many years of dependable

service. We are sure that you will feel confident with your Fluke oscilloscope.

Fluke is in the process of constantly improving products and documentation. For

any problems or suggestions, please contact the Fluke Service Center nearest you.

A complete listing of addresses for the Fluke Service Centers can be found in the

Reference Manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 1

5 FUNCTION REFERENCE

This chapter contains an alphabetized description of each oscilloscope function.

For easy reference, the functions are organized in the following order:

1. The Function description

Explanation and detailed information about the function.

2. Key sequence

Tells the operator which keys/controls to use to select the desired function.

The first key/control mentioned is always one of the front panel menu selection

keys, and the other keys are the softkeys.

3. Remote commands

Gives information about the command to be programmed for the operation of

the relevant function via a remote control interface. For more detailed

programming information, see Chapter 6.

Note 1:

Finding your way through the menus.

Some functions are attained via successive steps through a tree structure of

menus. An example is how to activate the key CLICK function:

- Press the UTILITY menu key.

- Press the SCREEN & SOUND softkey.

- Press the SOUND softkey.

- Press the CLICK softkey to activate ’on’.

The shortform annotation for these steps is ’UTILITY >> SCREEN & SOUND

>> SOUND >> CLICK on’.

Note 2:

A complete function index is part of this Operating Manual. This

function index contains all function names and reference words in

alphabetical order including the relevant chapter and page number

where more detailed information can be found. It can be found at the

end of this manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 2

FUNCTION REFERENCE

ACQUISITION LENGTH

Description:

The oscilloscope allows the user to select the acquisition length, or record length

that best suits the needs of the application. The default acquisition length is 512

data points for each trace. It is possible to increase the length of a trace from 512

points up to a maximum 8K points (or 32K points if the memory expansion option

is installed). This results in a trace length of 16 screens, or 160 divisions.

The TB MODE menu offers four choices to select the acquisition length. This

menu is accessed via the key sequence ’TB MODE >> ACQ LENGTH >> ..’

Selection of the desired acquisition length is then made with the soft keys as

indicated. Note that all registers will be cleared when the length is changed. The

user must confirm the change of the acquisition length.

The X POS control is used to move the trace in horizontal direction and to display

any desired part. A bar graph shows which part of the trace is displayed on the

screen. By using the MAGNIFY key pair, you can expand the trace up to 32 times

to look at signal details. The MAGNIFY keys can also be used to compress the

signal to fit the display width and look at the total waveform. This is realized

without the loss of vertical information.

The 8K acquisition memory is shared between all channels. In the ’2ch@4K pts’

mode the entire memory is used for the two channels, so triggerview of the

external trigger channel is not possible.

In the standard mode the trace length is 512 samples and all channels can be

acquired simultaneously. In this mode, more traces can be stored in the reference

memory, and the screen update rate increases. This mode also supports delayed

timebase operation. This way, acquisition can consist of up to eight traces, four Main

TB and four Delayed TB traces ( for the 2 channel models: six traces, two Main TB

traces, two Delayed Time Base traces and two Trigger View (MTB+DTB) traces).

The following table shows the selection possibilities for a standard oscilloscope

with 8K acquisition memory.

Acquisition length

Reference memory

Traces

)

512

2 registers of 1 trace each

2 registers of 2 traces each

2 registers of 4 (3) traces each

8 registers of 4 (3) traces each

3 (3)

6 (6)

12 (9)

40 (30)

) memory plus acquisition; 2 ch. models between brackets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 3

MEMORY EXPANSION

With the Extended Memory Option installed, the acquisition memory can be made

as long as 32K. When shorter acquisitions are selected, more traces can be

stored in memory with a maximum of 208 (156) traces.

Acquisition

Reference memory

Traces

)

1 x 32K

2 x 16K

3 x 8K

2 registers of 1 traces each

2 registers of 2 traces each

2 registers of 4 (3) traces each

50 registers of 4 (3) traces each

3 (3)

6 (6)

12 (9)

3 x 512

208 (156)

) memory plus acquisition; 2 ch. models between brackets

Key sequence:

4ch@

512 pts

ACQ

TB MODE

LENGHT

Softkey to select 512 points with confirm menu.

Softkey to select 2K points with confirm menu.

Softkey to select 4K points with confirm menu.

Softkey to select 8K points with confirm menu.

4ch@

2k pts

2ch@

4k pts

1ch@

8k pts

ST6751

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 4

FUNCTION REFERENCE

ADD INVERT SUBTRACT

Description:

The CH1 + CH2 (CH3 + CH4) key in the control section for CH1 (CH3) can be

used to display additional traces of the sums of these channels. CH3 + CH4 is

only present in the 4 channels models.

The invert key (INV) in the control section for CH2 (CH4) can be used for signal

inversion.

A differential mode is provided by adding CH1 (CH3) and ’Inv’ CH2 (CH4) together.

In analog mode the two channel and the added trace are displayed at the same

time. In digital mode however channel and added trace are displayed separately.

Switching between both is done with the CH1+CH2 (CH3 + CH4) toggle key.

Activating the function will turn off AUTO RANGE AMPL.

CH1

Suppression of common mode

components in two signals using the

CH2

differential mode.

ONLY THE SQUARE

WAVE WILL BE

CH1-CH2

DISPLAYED.

MAT4202

Key sequence:

CH... + CH...

Toggle key to switch the addition of CH1 and CH2 or CH3

and CH4 on/off

INV

Toggle key to switch the inverted display of CH2 (CH4)

on/off

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 5

ADD (MATHEMATICS)

Description:

The ADD function performs a point-to-point addition of two traces, related to the

two ground levels (indicated as ‘-’). The result of the ADD function is a new trace

in a different register. This trace can be scaled and positioned.

Scaling is the correction of the resultant trace to fit in the screen. The TRACK

control adjusts scaling.

Vertical positioning is called offset. It offsets each sample in the resultant trace

with a value so that the trace can be "moved" vertically. The ∆ control adjusts the

vertical positioning. The scale factor and the offset factor are displayed in the

‘MATH SCALE’ menu. Pressing the ‘autoscale’ softkey automatically selects the

settings so the trace fits the screen.

When you add signals with different amplitude settings, the smaller signal is

automatically adapted to the larger signal.

Either newly acquired traces or previously stored traces can be used as the

sources for this process and each can be selected with the control. The resulting

trace is automatically written in a register memory (m1 for math1 or m2 for math2).

To see the result more clearly, you can use the DISPLAY SOURCE on/off softkey

to turn off the two source traces.

Mathematical description:

Result = S1 + S2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 6

FUNCTION REFERENCE

Key sequence:

add

substract

multiply

filter

MATH

MATH1(2)

Control to select the ADD process.

∆

Control to select the first source trace.

Control to select the second source trace.

∆

on off

Toggle softkey to switch the ADD

function on.

SCALE

TRACK

∆

Control to adjust the scale factor.

∆

Control to adjust the offset factor.

auto

scale

Toggle softkey to select the autoscaling.

DISPLAY

SOURCE

yes no

Toggle softkey to switch the source

traces on and off.

ST7271

9303

Remote commands:

CPL: QW (Command to query a waveform).

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 7

ALT/CHOP

Description:

In the analog mode, when two or more channels are selected, the oscilloscope

displays multiple channels in a ‘time shared’ mode. This implies that a fast

electronic switch connects each input signal to the output amplifier in turn. This

can be done at the end of every sweep, or at a high frequency. The display modes

are referred to as Alternate or Chop modes.

Alternate mode: After each sweep of the time base has been completed, the

channel switch selects the next channel to be displayed during the next sweep.

The result is that each channel is displayed one after the other. At fast timebase

speeds this mode assures maximum intensity, while slow timebase speeds in

alternate mode result in a flickering display.

Chopped mode: In this mode, the channel selector switch operates at a high

frequency, and is no coupled to the time base sweep. This mode is recommended

for slow timebase speeds. The display switches very fast (1 MHz) between the

channels, which results in what appears to be a simultaneous display of all

channels.

ALT/CHOP is not available with single trace display.

In the digital mode channel 1 and channel 2 each have their own digitizer for

simultaneous sampling on both channels. In this two-channel mode ALT/CHOP is

not active.

If a combination of channel 1 or 2, and channel 3 or 4 is selected, the ALT/CHOP

is active and functions in the following way:

ALT results in a complete memory acquisition of channel 1 or 2 simultaneously

sampled, followed by a complete memory acquisition of channel 3 or 4, also

simultaneously sampled.

CHOP results in a single sample being made on channel 1 or 2 followed by a

single sample on channel 3 or 4. This continues until the acquisition memory for

each channel is filled. This ALT/CHOP function is valid only for the real-time

sampling timebase speeds.

NOTE: For further details on three or four channel operation, also refer to the

ACQUISITION LENGTH and PEAK DETECTION functions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 8

FUNCTION REFERENCE

The alternate and chopped modes are shown in the figures below.

ALTERNATE MODE

.....

MAT4203

CHOPPED MODE

.....

Key sequence:

alt chop

TB MODE

Toggle softkey to select ALTernate or CHOPped mode.

ST6845

9303

ANALOG MODE

Description:

You can use the yellow ANALOG key to switch from the analog mode to the digital

mode and back at any time. The signal acquisition and display functions of both

operating modes are very similar. Depending on the nature of the signal used or

the choice of the measurement, you may prefer the analog mode.

This is especially true for the following types of signals:

•

amplitude modulated signals

frequency modulated signals

fast sweeps

long serial data streams

most video signals

observing signal changes (e.g., adjustments)

The same waveform is usually displayed in the same manner, whether you select

the analog or the digital mode. However, some functions are not implemented in

both modes. For instance, the digital mode permits the viewing of pre-trigger

information. The digital mode also offers auto-range for main time base and

vertical channels. These functions are not available in the analog mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 9

If switching from one mode to another results in an unsatisfactory display, press

the yellow key a second time to return to the original situation.

Key sequence:

ANALOG

Toggle key to switch between analog mode and digital

mode.

AUTO RANGE

Description:

The AUTO RANGE function automatically selects the input sensitivity of the

vertical channels and time/div of the main timebase to obtain an optimum display

of the input signal(s). AUTO RANGE is a continuous function: vertical channel or

time/div settings are adapted if the input signal changes.

The AUTO RANGE function of the vertical channels automatically selects the

input sensitivity. The result is that the input signal is displayed with 2 to 6.4

divisions of amplitude. The amplitude is between 1 and 3.2 divisions with

DISPLAY WINDOWS on. AUTO RANGE can be turned on separately for each

vertical channel. AUTO RANGE functions at input sensitivities between 5V and

50 mV/div. Input coupling is put to ac if AUTO RANGE is switched on: dc or

ground coupling can be selected manually. AUTO RANGE is switched off after

operation of the AMPL key, the AUTOSET key, the channel’s AUTORANGE key,

channel ADD key or changing Acquisition length.

The AUTO RANGE function of the main timebase (MAIN TB) adjusts the

timebase automatically so that 2 to 6 waveform periods are displayed. To turn off

AUTO RANGE, press the TIME/DIV key, the AUTOSET key, or the main timebase

AUTORANGE key.

In VARiable timebase mode the AUTO RANGE function tries to keep the

displayed trace unchanged.

Key sequence:

AUTO RANGE

Toggle key to switch the AUTO RANGE function of main

timebase and vertical channels.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 10

FUNCTION REFERENCE

AUTOSET

Description:

The AUTOSET function sets the oscilloscope so that an optimum display of the

input signals is obtained within the same mode analog or digital. Operating the

AUTOSET key results in:

Channels with an input signal are switched on; others are switched off.

Input coupling is set to ac; because of this autoset does not function at very

low signal frequencies.

Input impedance is set to 1 MΩ

Input attenuator settings are optimized; VAR function off.

Bandwidth limiter and INVert are switched off.

ALT or CHOP mode selected to most optimal display.

Vertical POS selection in center screen.

Edge triggering on positive slope is activated.

Trigger source is the channel with the lowest frequency; at equal frequency

the lower channel number is selected. Trigger source is EXT TRIG input when

a signal is present, and Trigger View becomes active.

Trigger coupling is set to ac and level-pp on.

Horizontal mode is switched to MAIN TB only.

Cursors and usertext are switched off; settings display is switched on.

These settings are suitable for most signal conditions. You can also customize

AUTOSET to your own application or preference. For information about

AUTOSET programming, refer to AUTOSET USERPROG.

Key sequence:

AUTOSET

Key to start the autoset

Remote commands:

CPL: AS (Command for Auto Setup)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 11

AUTOSET SEQUENCE

Description:

If front panel settings are stored in memory locations ‘s1 to s5’ and ‘s6’ is cleared,

then the range of ‘s1 to s5’ becomes a sequence of front panel settings. Such a

sequence can be used as (part of) a step-by-step testing procedure. The two

following methods can be used to quickly step through such a sequence. This

saves time by not without having to recall each setting from a menu:

Programming the AUTOSET key to be used as the ‘recall next setup’ key. This

selection is done in the UTILITY >> AUTOSET menu.

Using a special probe with a COMMAND switch. Two probes with COMMAND

switch are delivered with each oscilloscope as standard accessory. The

appropriate mode for this probe command can be selected in the UTILITY >>

PROBE menu.

To return to the ‘normal’ oscilloscope mode, press the STATUS and TEXT OFF

key simultaneously to recall the STANDARD SETUP.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 12

FUNCTION REFERENCE

AUTOSET USERPROG

Description:

A number of instrument settings after AUTOSET can be customized to your

special needs when the standard default settings do not fit on your application.

The selections are reached via the key sequence ’UTILITY >> AUTOSET >>

userprog’. This gives access to VERT, TRIG and PROBE submenus where the

selections are made. The following table shows possible selections. Unaffect

means that existing selections are not overruled by AUTOSET.

Description

Standard

Userprog

AUTOSET

alternatives

UTILITY>>AUTOSET

>>userprog>>.

Channel selection

Input coupling

Input Impedance

Bandwidth limiter

Triggering

volt/div, on/off

unaffect

VERT

TRIG

dc, unaffect

50Ω, unaffect ¹⁾

on, unaffect

unaffect

1 MΩ

off

edge, ac,

level-pp on,

auto, LEVEL

MTB center

Probe

manual probe

selection set

to 1:1

unaffect

manual probe

selections

PROBE

¹⁾200 MHz models only

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 13

Key sequence:

AUTOSET

off

default

userprog

setups

UTILITY

AUTOSET

Toggle softkey to activate userprog

CHANNELS

scan

unaffect

Toggle softkey to preset channels

on/off and input attenuator after

AUTOSET.

VERT

ac dc

unaffect

Toggle softkey to preset input

coupling after AUTOSET

1MΩ 50Ω

unaffect

Toggle softkey to preset input

impedance after AUTOSET

BWL

on off

unaffect

Toggle softkey to preset reaction of

bandwidth limiter after AUTOSET.

UNAFFECT

yes no

TRIG

Toggle softkey to preset trigger

settings after AUTOSET.

PROBE

1:1

Toggle softkey to preset probe

attenuation factor (for probes

without indication ring) after

AUTOSET.

unaffect

PROBE

ST6066

9303

Remote commands:

CPL: AS (Command for an Auto Setup)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 14

FUNCTION REFERENCE

AVERAGE

Description:

Valid in digital mode only.

Averaging is a process to reduce random noise without losing bandwidth.

Averaging can only be used for repetitive signals.

Every sample point is calculated after every subsequent acquisition as follows:

measured – previous

new = previous + -----------------------------------------------------------

In this formula "previous" is the result of the average function after the previous

acquisition, on the same sample position as the measured one. "C" is the

average-factor. Noise is reduced by a factor which is equal to the square root of "C".

Average values for "C" can be selected from 2 to 4096 in a binary sequence. To

do so, use the TRACK control in the ACQUIRE menu.

Averaging also results in a higher vertical resolution resulting in higher

measurement accuracy.

Averaging can be quickly switched on and off with the direct access key

(AVERAGE) on the front panel, or via the ACQUIRE menu. Once activated,

average is a continuous process until it is switched off. However, whenever the

display is changed (e.g. POS, AMPL/DIV) the average process will restart.

AVERAGE is mutually exclusive with ENVELOPE. If the ENVELOPE mode is

selected, AVERAGE is automatically switched off.

Key sequence:

AVERAGE

Key to switch the AVERAGE function on or off.

TRACK

ACQUIRE

Control to select the AVERAGE factor.

ST6555

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 15

BANDWIDTH LIMITER

Description:

The bandwidth limiter cuts the bandwidth of all vertical channels to 20 MHz and

makes noisy input signals look smoother. The bandwidth limiter does not affect

triggering. The following figure shows the effect of the bandwidth limiter.

0dB

Effect of bandwidth limiter

−3dB

BWL

OFF

FULL

BANDWITH

20MHz

FREQ.

MAT4204

Key sequence:

BW LIMIT

on off

VERT MENU

Toggle softkey to switch the vertical bandwidth limiter

on/off

ST6556

9312

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 16

FUNCTION REFERENCE

CALIBRATION AUTOCAL

Description:

The CAL key is used to make a fine adjustment of the oscilloscope’s input, trigger,

and timebase circuitry to achieve high accuracy even under extreme

environmental conditions such as very high or very low temperatures. In a

workshop or laboratory environment, a fine adjustment once a week or even

every month is sufficient.

It is recommended that you do the fine adjustment after the instrument has

warmed up. For a complete calibration (advised once a year or every 2000

service hours), a special submenu is available in the maintenance menu.

Calibration data are protected by a keyword and a seal. Calibration should be

done by qualified personnel only. For details, refer to the chapter ’Calibration

Adjustment Procedure’ in the service manual.

Attention: Calibration autocal data disappears after having removed back up

batteries while the oscilloscope is not powered by line.

Key sequence:

CAL

Key to start the fine adjustment procedure. Press this key

for at least 2 seconds to start the procedure.

Remote commands:

CPL: CL (Command for Calibrate)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 17

CHANNEL/TRACE SELECTION

Description:

In this family of instruments, the distinction is made between ‘channel’ and ‘trace’.

A channel is referred to as an input channel, complete with AMPL and POS

settings. A trace represents a waveform which has been stored in one of the

on the screen as a trace.

Each channel can be turned ON and OFF by the ON key located near the channel

keys on the front panel. In the digital mode, this key switches the acquisition and

the display on/off.

In the digital mode, a waveform which has been previously stored in a register, can

be recalled and displayed via the RECALL menu. One of the registers (M0) is the

acquisition register, where the newly acquired data from the input channels is stored.

The RECALL function only switches on and off the display of the trace and does

not influence the acquisition. It allows the running acquisition to be hidden to give

a better view of the processed results calculated from an acquisition running in

the ‘background’.

In addition to the acquisition register (M0), the scope provides eight different

location can hold a maximum of one of the following:

4 (3) waveforms of 512 samples.

4 (3) waveforms of 2K samples.

2 (2) waveforms of 4K samples.

1 (1) waveform of 8K samples.

The number of stored waveforms depends on

the selected acquisition length and the number

of channels that were active at the moment of

the acquisition.

To switch single traces on and off instead of a

total register, the bottom key in the RECALL

menu can be used to select TRACE instead of

oriented instead of register oriented.

Example : m1 changes in m1.1 and m1.2,

representing the labels for the ch1

trace in m1 and the ch2 trace in m1,

respectively. Label m1.e is for the

External Trigger input signal in m1.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 18

FUNCTION REFERENCE

Key sequence:

Key to switch a channel ON or OFF.

TRACK

RECALL

Control to select a register or a trace to be recalled

from memory.

DISPLAY

off

Toggle softkey to turn the display of the selected

trace or register ON or OFF.

trace

Toggle softkey to deselect traces or deselect registers.

ST6557

9303

CONFIDENCE CHECK

Description:

After turning the oscilloscope on, a confidence check starts automatically. The

following is tested in sequence:

The instrument’s internal control bus.

The communication between front panel and internal microprocessor.

The settings in the memory (with backup batteries installed only).

Interface to digitizer circuitry.

The selftest takes less than a second. A message appears on the screen when

errors are found.

The settings stored in memory become active with backup batteries installed.

These are the same settings present when the instrument was last switched off.

With no batteries present, the standard default setting ’std’ is activated. Refer to

STANDARD SETUPS for details.

Key sequence:

POWER ON OFF

Toggle key to switch the oscilloscope on/off. Starts

confidence check

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 19

CURSORS

Description:

Cursors are on-screen measuring lines. They can be moved using the TRACK

and ∆ controls. Cursors can be positioned on signal details of interest and can be

used for accurate measurements.

Basically there are two types of cursors: vertical lines (||) called time cursors and

horizontal lines (=) called volt cursors. A simultaneous display of both cursor

types (#) is possible.

If the acquisition length in digital mode is more than 10 horizontal screen

divisions, it is possible to position the cursors horizontally along the complete

acquisition. When a cursor that is visible on the screen is moved outside the

screen, it will drag the trace with it. This means that the X POSition is changed. A

bar graph shows the display window and cursor positions in relation to the total

acquisition length. The cursors are trace oriented rather than display oriented.

The acquisition length can be selected via the TB MODE menu.

The readout of the delta between the cursor lines is shown in the cursor display

area (upper part of the CRT viewing area). In analog mode the display can be in

voltage or time, and is in digital mode in voltage and time at the same time. In this

way cursors can be used for accurate on-screen measurements without using the

graticule. Additional readout information can be selected under the READOUT

softkey. For details see the CURSOR READOUT function.

The cursors are activated via the menus under the CURSORS menu key. The

structure of the menu is shown in Appendix B.

Activating the cursors is made with the ’CURSORS on/off’ menu selection.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 20

FUNCTION REFERENCE

CURSORS

TIME

CURSORS

The time cursors are used for time

measurements. The example shows the

required softkey settings for period

measurements. The cursor positioning

with the TRACK and ∆ controls is also

shown.

on off

ch... ∆T=...

READOUT

TRACK

∆

ST6553

9303

CURSORS

VOLT

CURSORS

The volt cursors are used for

voltage measurements. When

more than one channel is on, the

desired channel for voltage

off

ch1

ch2

readout must be selected with the

ch2 ∆V=...

∆

ch1, ch2 pair of softkeys. When

more than one channel is on, the

desired channel for voltage

READOUT

TRACK

readout must be selected with the

ch1, ch2 pair of softkeys. In digital

mode stored traces can

ST6552

9303

also be used for voltage measurements. The figure shows the required settings.

The cursor positioning with the TRACK and ∆ controls is also shown. The

example shows how peak-peak voltage measurement is done.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

CURSORS

5 - 21

BOTH

In this mode, both voltage and

time cursors are active. The

TRACK and ∆ controls operate as

in VOLT or TIME mode, as

CURSORS

on off

ch1

ch2

selected with the CONTROL key.

ch2 ∆T=... ∆V=...

∆

CONTROL

READOUT

TRACK

∆

ST6554

9303

Key sequence:

Toggle function softkey to switch between cursors on and off.

Toggle function softkey to switch between volt, time or both

cursors.

Softkey pair to select CH1 or CH2 for measurements. Selects in

digital mode also stored traces.

Toggle function softkey to switch between volt and time cursors

for positioning. This selection is usable only in the ’both’ cursor

mode.

TRACK

Control to shift both cursors simultaneously, or to shift the

track cursor only. Selection in the CURSORS READOUT

menu determines one of the two.

∆

Control to shift the ∆ cursor.

Remote commands:

CPL: QM (command to query measured values)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 22

FUNCTION REFERENCE

CURSORS READOUT

Description:

The cursors offer a wide variety of voltage and time readouts. For comparison of

signal details the ratio mode is very suitable. When in analog mode time or volt

cursors have been selected, only the relevant readouts are displayed in the

READOUT menu. In digital mode all readouts are displayed at the same time.

The various readout selections for time, volt and ’both’ are reached via the key

sequence ’CURSORS >> READOUT’.

CURSORS READOUT

TIME

Three time interval readouts can be selected:

∆T: Gives the time between the cursors.

1/∆T: This results is a frequency readout. The readout is correct when the

distance between the cursors equals one signal period.

∆T-ratio: The readout is a percentage

ch ... :∆V=100%

that can be reset by using the

’∆T=100 %’ softkey. This mode can be

used for time comparisons. The figure

shows an example of a duty cycle

measurement. First the cursors are

positioned at the period and the readout

is set to 100%. Then the pulse width is

measured.

Phase (ph): The readout is a number of

-POSITION CURSORS

ON 1 SIGNAL PERIOD

∆

TRACK

-PRESS ∆T=100%

degrees that can be reset using the

’∆T=360 °’ softkey.

T-trg (time to trigger): The readout gives

the time between the trigger point and

each time cursors.

ch ... :∆T=25%

-POSITION ∆ CURSOR

ON NEGATIVE SLOPE

OF PULSE

∆

MAT4210

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 23

VOLT

CURSORS READOUT

Three readouts can be selected:

ch ... :∆V=100%

∆V: Gives the voltage difference

between the cursors.

TRACK

V1 V2: Gives the absolute voltage

with respect to ground for each

cursor. V1 and V2 have to be

selected separately.

∆

∆V-ratio: The readout is a

-POSITION CURSORS ON TOP/BOTTOM OF SIGNAL

percentage that can be reset

using the ’∆=100 %’ softkey. This

can be used for amplitude

-PRESS ∆V=100%

∆

ch ... :∆V=12.5%

comparisons. The figure shows an

example: the percentage of

overshoot compared with 100 %

pulse amplitude is determined.

-POSITION ∆ CURSOR ON TOP OF OVERSHOOT

MAT4211

Key sequence:

∆T 1/∆T

∆T-ratio

ph T-trg

READ

CURSORS

OUT

Softkey pair to switch between time readout ∆T,

1/∆T, ∆T-ratio, phase, and T-trg.

BOTH

∆V

V1&V2

∆V-ratio

Toggle function softkey to switch between

voltage readout ∆V, V1, V2 or ∆V-ratio.

∆V=100%

∆T=100%

∆T=360°

Softkey to reset ∆V-ratio to 100%, ∆T-ratio to

100% or phase to 360°.

cursor

track

yes no

Toggle function softkey to link the TRACK control

to both cursors or to the track cursor only.

CONTROL

Toggle function softkey to switch between time or

volt cursor for 100% reset and positioning.

ST6846

9312

Remote commands:

CPL: QM (command to query measured values)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 24

FUNCTION REFERENCE

DELAY

Description:

Delay is the term that is used to define the time difference between the trigger

point of an acquisition and the starting point of the resulting trace. In an analog

oscilloscope, the trigger point is at the beginning of a trace, and the delay is said

to be zero. The use of a Delayed Timebase introduces a delay between the trigger

point of the Main Timebase and the start of the trace which is displayed with the

Delayed Timebase.

Three types of Delay.

This family of oscilloscopes has three types of adjustable delay :

1. Delay controlled by the DELAY control on the front panel. This is the amount of

time delay between the start of the Main Timebase and the Delayed Timebase.

This delay applies to the Analog mode, as well as to the Digital mode.

2. A delay between the trigger point and a signal acquisition. This delay is used

to ‘position’ the acquired input signal with respect to the trigger point. This type

of delay can be ‘positive’, as well as ‘negative’. The result is the acquisition of

posttrigger or pretrigger waveform data, respectively.

This delay is available in the digital mode only and is controlled with the

TRIGGER POSITION control.

3. Delay caused by counting EVENTS. Available in the digital mode only. The

use of EVENTS delay causes the acquisition to start after a user selectable

number of events has been counted.

Delay

A full description is given under Delayed Timebase.

Trigger position

Pretrigger is used to observe a portion of the signal that occurs before the trigger

point. This trigger point is then indicated in the screen by a marker (s). The

maximum pretrigger is the acquisition length. In this case, the trigger point marker

is positioned on the right side of the screen and the entire record contains

pretrigger information. The pretrigger view is indicated (in divisions) in the bottom

of the screen.

Posttrigger is used for time delay and is expressed in seconds or fractions

thereof. The maximum delay depends on the setting of the main timebase.

Maximum trigger delay is 100 divisions; the resolution is 1/50 of the timebase

TIME/DIV setting.

Event delay

Event delay postpones triggering until a specific number of trigger events have

occurred. The trigger event is defined in the EVENT DELAY sub menu of the TB

MODE. Its definition consists of a signal source and a trigger level (event level).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 25

Every time the signal crosses this level the event counter is incremented by one.

When the event counter reaches the selected delay value, the scope triggers and

a new signal acquisition is started. The number of events to be counted before the

acquisition starts is selected by using the ∆ control in the EVENT DELAY sub

menu.

Event delay and trigger position can be used in combination to offer powerful

delay capabilities.

CH1

CH2

ACQUISITION:

TRIGGER

POSITION

CH1: SLOPE

CH2: EVENT, COUNT=8

TRIGGER POSITION: .... ms

ST6768

Key sequence:

Control to adjust of the trigger position.

Toggle softkey to switch the Event mode on and off.

When the Event mode is turned on, further menu

selections are displayed

Control to change the number of events. Readout in

the menu is called ‘COUNT’.

Toggle softkey to select the channel on which the

events must be counted.

Control to set the events level. Readout in the menu is

called ‘LEVEL’.

Toggle softkey to select the positive or negative slope.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 26

FUNCTION REFERENCE

DELAY MEASUREMENT

Description:

In the digital mode, the MEASURE menu provides a ‘delay’ measurement. This

is an automatic measurement of the time between two 50% levels ("mesials") of

the first leading or trailing edge of two signals. The menu is reached with the key

sequence ‘MEASURE >> MEAS1(2) >> delay’ The lower part of the menu is then

automatically changed to the delay measurement.

Newly acquired signals or signals stored in memory can be used as sources for

this measurement. The ∆ and TRACK controls are used to select the two sources.

Sources have to be traces in the same register memory to avoid any possible

error of making delay measurements between traces that were not part of the

same acquisition.

For each source there is a softkey to select the slope of the edge (leading edge

or trailing edge).

The delay is displayed in the top left corner of the screen (‘del = ....µs’).

Delay = (leading/trailing edge S1 - leading/trailing edge S2)

where:

S1 and S2 are source signals S1 and S2

Refer to section MEASURE MENU for details of signal parameters.

S1:

S2:

ST6658

DELAY

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 27

Key sequence:

delay

MEASURE MEAS1(2)

Toggle softkey to select the delay measurement in

menu DELAY 1 or DELAY 2.

TRACK

Control to select the reference waveform.

Toggle softkey to select the slope of the reference

waveform. Referred to "zero" delay.

∆

Control to select the second waveform.

Toggle softkey to select the slope of the second

waveform.

on off

Toggle softkey to switch the delay measurement

on and off.

ST6754

9303

Remote commands:

CPL: QM (Command to query a measurement)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

DELAYED TIMEBASE (DEL’D TB)

Description:

The Delayed Timebase (DEL’D TB) is used to examine a signal detail of interest.

The detail to be examined is indicated as an intensified part of the MAIN TB trace

and is displayed on the full screen width using the DEL’D TB time scale.

The DELAY control adjusts the delay between the start of the MAIN TB and DEL‘D

TB sweep. Refer to the TRIGGER DEL’D TB function for more details.

The DEL’D TB time scale is adjusted in steps with the delayed timebase

TIME/DIV key pair.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 28

FUNCTION REFERENCE

In the DELAYED TIMEBASE menu, which is selected with the DTB key, the

delayed timebase can be switched on. This is done with the first softkey called

‘DEL’D TB on/off’. Once activated, the delayed timebase trace is displayed. The

main timebase trace can be switched off using the ‘MAIN TB on/off’ softkey. If both

main and delayed time bases are displayed, you can separate them by using the

TRACE SEP function.

DTB START DIRECTLY AFTER DELAY TIME (STARTS)

DELAY

DELAY TIME

Function of ’mtb+dtb’, DELAY

and TRACE SEP.

TRACK

ST6750

Key sequence:

DEL’ DTB

on off

DTB

Toggle softkey to switch the delayed timebase on or off.

MAIN TB

on off

Toggle softkey to switch the main timebase on or off.

TRACK

Control to adjust the vertical distance (TRACE SEP)

between MAIN TB and DEL’D TB traces.

ST6756

9303

TIME/DIV ns

Key pair to adjust the DEL’D TB time scale.

DELAY

Control to adjust delay time between start of MAIN TB and DEL’D

TB sweeps.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 29

DIGITAL MODE

Description:

The yellow ANALOG key is used to switch from the analog mode to the digital

mode and back at any time. The signal acquisition and display functions of both

operating modes are very similar. However, the nature of the signal used or the

choice of the measurement may determine when it is best to use the digital mode.

Digital storage is used for the following:

•

recording of single events, or very low frequencies

pretrigger and posttrigger view

glitch triggering

saving, recalling and comparing multiple traces

automatic measurements

signal mathematics

signal analysis

making hard copies (plot/print)

digital mode offers the convenience of the auto range function for the vertical

channels and the main time base.

The same waveform is usually displayed in the same manner, regardless of the

operating mode selected. However, some functions are not implemented in both

modes. In the analog mode, for instance, no ‘pretrigger’ information can be made

visible.

If switching from one mode to another results in an unsatisfactory display, press

the yellow key once more to return to the previous situation.

Key sequence:

ANALOG

Toggle switch to switch between analog mode and digital

mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 30

FUNCTION REFERENCE

DISPLAY MENU

Description:

The DISPLAY menu offers a set of powerful display functions for the analog mode

and the digital mode.

In the analog mode, the scope can be set to the X DEFLECTION mode. In this

mode XY displays can be generated from a combination of any of the input

channels for X and Y, while the analog timebase generator is turned off.

In the digital mode, the display menu is extended with additional display functions

such as: WINDOWS, VERTICAL MAGNIFY, X vs Y, TEXT GENERATOR and

INTERPOLATION.

For the X DEFLECTION function for the analog mode, refer to X DEFLECTION

further on in this chapter.

WINDOWS automatically separates the traces on the screen when more than one

trace is displayed. Each trace is then displayed in a window.

When two channels are displayed, one is displayed in the upper half of the

screen, and the other is displayed in the bottom half. When three traces from

different channels are displayed, the screen is divided into four windows of two

divisions each.

Even when only two divisions are allocated to a trace, for each trace is displayed

with the full dynamic range of 8 bits and the full 256 ADC levels are still used. The

displayed amplitude of the signal and its screen readout, has however, been

adapted to the new window space. Also the range of the POS controls is limited

to the new window. The windows mode is especially useful in multichannel

applications. It eliminates trace positioning and scaling, while retaining maximum

resolution, accuracy and trigger sensitivity.

VERT MAGNIFY is used to vertically expand signals without changing the

AMPL/DIV setting of the input channels. It can be used to study signal details in

high resolution acquisitions such as an averaged waveform. The signals can be

expanded up to 32 times, and the magnification factor is displayed in the

DISPLAY menu. At the same time the vertical deflection (volts/div) in the bottom

text area is adjusted.

X versus Y is an XY display capability in the digital mode. It is similar to X deflection

in the analog operating mode. The TRACK control is used to select the source for

vertical direction (Y). The source can be any newly acquired trace but it can also be

a saved trace in a memory location (e.g., m3). For horizontal direction (X) you can

choose from any active channel or a signal saved in memory (e.g., m3.1) as well.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 31

Horizontal source selection is made with softkeys. X and Y sources must always be

traces from the same register memory.

This is done to avoid errors because the traces have to be sampled simultaneously

to give a useful and correct X vs Y display.

The TEXT submenu allows you to display ‘user text’ as additional information in

the viewing area. This can be very useful when making photographs or hard

copies on printers or plotters. For a detailed description, refer to the USER TEXT

function. The submenu is also used for on/off switching of the trigger level

indicators for MAIN TB-, DEL’D, TB- and EVENT- triggering, and the ground level

indicators for each channel.

INTERPOLATION determines if and how the spaces between sample points are

displayed. The choices can be dots (samples only - interpolation tuned off), linear

or sine interpolation activated. Linear interpolation is the default. The following

description applies:

dots:

linear:

sine:

The space between the sample points is blanked. Only the real

samples are shown.

The space between the sample points is interpolated linearly. Straight

lines are drawn between sample points.

The space between the sample points is interpolated using a sine

wave interpolation algorithm. This mode is used to obtain a more

accurate display of mainly sinusoidal signals which were

undersampled.

Key sequence:

Softkey to select the X-DEFLection mode, refer

to the X- DEFLECTION function (in analog mode

only).

DISPLAY

X-DEFL

WINDOWS

on off

Separates the displayed signals and sets them in

a window (in digital mode only).

VERT

MAGNIFY

Softkey to turn on the vertical magnification

(in digital mode only).

TRACK

Control to determine the magnification factor.

ST6784

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 32

FUNCTION REFERENCE

on off

DISPLAY

X vs Y

Softkey to select the X vs Y mode, see function

X-DEFLECTION (in digital mode only).

TRACK

Control to select the Y source.

Softkey to select the X source.

X SOURCE

ST6785

9303

TRIG IND

on off

DISPLAY

TEXT

Toggle softkey to display trigger level indication.

GND IND

on off

Toggle softkey to display or blank ground level

indicators.

USERTEXT

Access to editing menu for USERTEXT (refer to

the USER TEXT function).

ST6786

9303

dots

linear

sine

Softkey to select sine-, linear-, or no interpolation

(in digital mode only).

DISPLAY

ST6755

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 33

ENVELOPE

Description:

If a waveform is changing over time (because of drift, jitter, or intermittent faults),

the ‘history’ of the changing waveform can be collected using the envelope mode.

In the envelope mode the minimum and maximum signal values are stored, taking

the values of a large number of successive waveform acquisitions. If an

interpolation mode is switched on, the area between the maximum and minimum

values is shaded.

Each time the settings of the scope are changed (like trace POS), the envelope

process is restarted by clearing the acquisition register. A new envelope process

starts and continues until stopped or until a change of settings is made.

ST6789

ST6788

Display of signal with

amplitude variation (AM).

Display of signal with frequency

variation (FM or jitter).

ENVELOPE and AVERAGE functions are mutually exclusive. When the AVERAGE

function is selected, the ENVELOPE mode is automatically switched off.

Key sequence:

ENVELOPE

on off

ACQUIRE

Toggle softkey to switch Envelope on or off.

ST6790

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 34

FUNCTION REFERENCE

EXTERNAL TRIGGER (2 CHANNELS MODELS ONLY)

Description:

The External Trigger input provides an extra input that can be used as the trigger

source for the Main Time Base (MTB).

The External Trigger input chargacteristics are simular to those of the input

channels 1 and 2. The input has probe range indication detection and two

attenuator positions (0.1 V/div. and 1 V/div.). If External is selected as trigger

source the same trigger modes (Edge, TV and Glitch) are availlable as for the

trigger sources CH1 and CH2.

When the External Trigger input is selected as trigger source , the signal on this

input can be made visible by pressing the function key TRIG VIEW. When another

Trigger source is selected, Trigger View is automatically switched off.

Trigger View can be used in Single- and Multiple shot in timebases up to 10µs/div.

In the other timebase modes Trigger View automatically selects Alternating mode

for timebases faster than 10µs/div. This result in the simultaneous acquisition of

the External Trigger input.

Key sequence:

EXT TRIG

Key to select the external trigger input as trigger source.

Selects trigger slope when External trigger is selected.

TRIG VIEW

Key to turn on and off the display of the external trigger

signal.

AMPL

Toggle key to switch between the attunuator settings

1 V/div and 0.1 V/div.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 35

FILTER

Description:

The FILTER function is a waveform MATH function. It is a post- acquisition

algorithm which can be used to simulate the effect of a low-pass filter process on

a trace. The cut-off frequency of the low-pass filter can be adjusted and the result

trace is stored as a new trace in a separate register. This implies that the original

waveform or trace is never disturbed by the process, allowing you to "experiment"

with different filter factors.

A typical use of this digital low pass filter is to suppress noise even after a signal

acquisition. Since the FILTER function is a post acquisition process, it can also be

used on single event waveforms.

Any newly acquired trace or previously stored trace can be used as the source for

the filter process.

The result trace is automatically written in memory location m1 for MATH1 and m2

for MATH2 and instantly displayed on the screen.

For each sample point of the trace, a (1 - cos X) weighted sum is calculated over

a window of N samples (convolution). N is adjusted with the ∆ control. The window

value is displayed in the ‘MATH FILTER PARAM’ menu. The resulting cut-off

frequency is the result of the sample rate set by the time base and N. The -3 dB

point is displayed in the bottom area of the screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 36

FUNCTION REFERENCE

Key sequence:

TRACK

MATH

MATH1(2)

Control to select the filter function from the MATH 1

or MATH 2 menu.

∆

Control to select the source signal.

on off

Toggle key to switch selected function on or off.

TRACK

PARAM

Control to select the number of samples for the filter

window.

DISPLAY

SOURCE

yes no

Toggle key to switch the display of the source trace

on or off.

ST6757

9303

Remote commands:

CPL: QW (Command to query a waveform)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

GLITCH TRIGGER

Glitch triggering examines a single channel, on one or more time conditions.

Any one of the channel inputs can be used as trigger source and is selected with

the keys ‘TRIG1, TRIG2’ or EXT TRIG. The same keys are used to toggle

between positive and negative glitch triggering.

Time qualification is selected with softkeys. These time conditions are:

n>t1

n<t2

range

triggers when the glitch is longer than the selected time t1. The

TRACK control is used to adjust t1.

triggers when the glitch is shorter than the time t2. The TRACK

control is used to adjust t2.

triggers when the glitch duration is between two time limits as

specified by t1 and t2. The TRACK control is used to adjust t1 and

the control is used to adjust t2.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 37

Key sequence:

Toggle key to select positive or negative

glitch detection.

Toggle softkey to select positive or

negative glitch detection.

Softkey pair to select the additional trigger

condition.

Control to adjust the conditional time or the

beginning of the range.

Control to adjust the end of the range.

HOLD OFF

Description:

The HOLD OFF control determines the hold off time.

In the analog mode, the hold off time is an additional ‘dead’ time after each

timebase sweep during which the MAIN TB trigger is inhibited. Variable HOLD

OFF enables the user to synchronize the display rate to the signal being

examined. This eliminates the problem of ‘double’ triggering on pulse train

information as shown in the figure.

For most signals the hold off must be minimal (0%), so that the sweep repetition

rate can be the highest permitted by the trigger signal. Turning the HOLD OFF

control clockwise increases the hold off time. When the hold off time is set longer

than is necessary to synchronize the signal, loss of light output will result.

In the digital mode, the variable hold off time serves a similar function, and the

extra time is used for processing previously captured data.

In digital mode, triggering on certain pulses can be achieved via the logic trigger

mode ’pattern’. For details refer to the LOGIC TRIGGER function.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 38

FUNCTION REFERENCE

SIGNAL

SWEEP

TRIG

HOLD OFF

(no triggers

accepted)

HOLD OFF

(no triggers

accepted)

HOLD OFF

(no triggers

accepted)

WAVEFORM

ON SCREEN

SIGNAL

SWEEP

TRIG

HOLD OFF

WAVEFORM

ON SCREEN

(DOUBLE

TRIGGERING)

MAT4213

Using HOLD OFF to suppress double triggering.

Key sequence:

HOLD OFF

Control to adjust MAIN TB hold off time.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 39

INPUT ATTENUATOR

Description:

MANUAL + AUTOMATIC

The oscilloscope’s input has a wide range of sensitivities. This enables signals of

different amplitudes to be displayed on the available screen area. Sensitivity

adjustment is done with key pair AMPL/VAR or a single AMPL toggle key (for the

External Trigger input).

Input sensitivity increases when the top key (mV) is pressed; it decreases when

the lower key (V) is pressed. The sensitivity adjustment can be done in steps or

continuously; switching between these modes is done by pressing both keys

simultaneously. The CRT readout resolution correspondingly changes. The

amplitude of a signal can be determined as described under the ’SCREEN

CONTROLS AND GRATICULE’ function. The AUTO RANGE key activates a

continuous automatic adjustment of input sensitivity. The result is a signal

amplitude on the screen between 2 and 6.4 divisions. This functions in digital

mode for input sensitivities up to 50 mV/div. For more information, refer to the

AUTO RANGE function.

For the External Trigger input, the input sensitivity can be adjusted to the two most

commonly used settings (1 V/div and 100 mV/div). Selection is done with a single

toggle key AMPL.

AUTO

RANGE

AMPL

CH1

100mV

500mV

CH1

MAT4165

9312

AMPL/div

Function of key pair AMPL/VAR

Key sequence:

AMPL

Key pair to adjust the vertical input sensitivity

in coarse or fine steps.

ST6182

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 40

FUNCTION REFERENCE

AUTO

RANGE

Toggle key to switch the AUTO RANGE function on/off

AMPL

Toggle key to switch between two vertical input sensitivities

of the External Trigger input channel.

INPUT COUPLING

Description:

The characteristics of the oscilloscope’s inputs can be selected for each channel.

A channel can be switched on/off with the toggle key ON. Display of the External

Trigger input signal is switched on/off with the toggle key TRIG VIEW. CH1 is

always switched on when all other channels are switched off.

In the dc coupled mode the complete signal including dc components and

extremely low frequencies (<10 Hz) are displayed. In the ac coupled mode, dc

components are suppressed. This results in a display of the ac components

(≥10 Hz).

Ground coupling (GND) interrupts the input signal. The position of the trace is at

the 0 volt level. A continuous ground level indication for each channel can also be

activated. Refer to the description of the UTILITY>>SCREEN&SOUND MENU

function.

The selections are made with the toggle keys AC/DC/GND for the channel inputs,

or AC/DC for the External Trigger input.

The type of coupling is given in the readout area using the symbols

(ac), = (dc)

and ⊥ (GND).

0dB

AC-COUPLING

DC-COUPLING

−3dB

10Hz

FULL BANDWITH

FREQ.

FULL BANDWITH

FREQ.

MAT4219

Effect of ac/dc input coupling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 41

Key sequence:

Toggle key to switch a channel on/off.

TRIG VIEW

AC/DC/GND

AC/DC

Toggle key to switch the display of the External Trigger

signal on/off.

Toggle key for vertical input coupling of the input

channels.

Toggle key for vertical input coupling of the External

Trigger input.

INPUT IMPEDANCE (200 MHZ MODELS ONLY)

Description:

For high-frequency measurements the input impedance can be switched from

1 MΩ to 50Ω. Input impedance is automatically adapted to the type of probe.

Manual switching is done with the toggle key 50Ω in the VERT MENU menu.

The 50Ω input is not available for the EXT TRIG.

The input is protected in the 1 MΩ as well as the 50Ω setting:

1 MΩ: protected for signals up to 400V.

50Ω: protected for peak voltages up to 50V or up to 5V rms.

For details, refer to the Reference Manual.

Key sequence:

Toggle key to switch 50Ω input impedance of CH1.

Toggle key to switch 50Ω input impedance of CH..

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 42

FUNCTION REFERENCE

LOGIC TRIGGER (4 CHANNELS MODELS ONLY)

Description:

Logic triggering enables triggering on a combination of the four input signals.

Each input is compared with a trigger level and is recognized as being either

HIGHer or LOWer than the trigger level. The four input signals together can be

regarded to be a 4-bit digital ‘word’. If this ‘word’ matches a certain pattern

triggering occurs. The 4-bit trigger pattern can be edited with the TRIG buttons in

each of the channel sections and is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the

screen with each input being identified as H=High, L=Low, or X=Don’t care.

(Example: HHxL).

There are three logic trigger modes: pattern, state, and glitch.

To enter the logic trigger mode select ‘logic’ from the TRIGGER MAIN TB menu.

The menu now displays the choices, and you use a softkey to select one of the

three logic trigger modes: pattern, state, or glitch.

State

State triggering, sometimes called conditional triggering, is used in applications

with clocked or synchronous systems. One of the four input signals must be

selected as the ‘clock’ signal. Triggering occurs on this clock edge, when the other

3-inputs match the selected three bit pattern (i.e., are TRUE). The clock edge may

be chosen as a rising or falling clock edge. In this menu you use a softkey pair to

select the trigger slope in combination with the keys TRIG1 through TRIG4 that

give the state (HIGH, LOW, or don’t care) for the three other trigger sources.

Example of a STATE trigger word: HLL, in which ch1 is used as positive clock

edge.

Pattern

The PATTERN mode is used to trigger the oscilloscope when a combination of up

to four signals is true for a specified amount of time. In other words, triggering

occurs only when two conditions are met; the combination and the time limits.

The trigger pattern is set as a combination of HIGH, LOW, or don’t care, of the

four input channels of the oscilloscope.

Example of a PATTERN: HHxL.

The PATTERN condition is set or edited with the TRIG buttons in each of the

vertical channel sections.

When the PATTERN condition is true for a specified amount of time, the

oscilloscope triggers.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 43

The time condition can be set in the softkey menu.

enter

exit

triggers when the pattern becomes true.

triggers when the pattern changes from true to false.

if>t1

triggers when the pattern is true and its duration exceeds a

specified time. The TRACK control is used to adjust time limit t1.

if<t2

triggers when the pattern condition exists for a time which is shorter

than t2. Triggering actually occurs when the pattern changes from

true to false in a time shorter than t2. The TRACK control is used

to adjust t2.

range

triggers when pattern remains true for a time longer than t1 and

shorter than t2. Triggering actually occurs when the pattern

changes from true to false within the specified time limits. The

TRACK control is used to adjust t1, and the control is used to

adjust t2.

Glitch

Refer to GLITCH TRIGGER function.

Key sequence:

state

pattern

glitch

edge tv

logic

TRIG

Toggle key to select the logic state for

CH1, CH2, CH3 and CH4.

TRIGGER

CLOCK

ch1 ch4

ch3 ch4

Softkey pair to select the trigger source

CH1 ... CH4 as clock input.

enter

exit

if>t1

if<t2

Softkey pair to select the additional trigger

condition.

TRACK

Control to adjust the conditional time or the

beginning of the range.

∆

Control to adjust the end of the range.

ST6758

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 44

FUNCTION REFERENCE

MAGNIFY HORIZONTAL

Description:

In the analog mode, the MAGNIFY key pair switches between the normal trace

and horizontal expansion of the trace by a factor of 10. The maximum timebase

speed is then increased from 20 ns/div to 2 ns/div.

In the digital mode, the same MAGNIFY key pair gives horizontal expansion of

x1, x2, x4 up to 32 times for detailed viewing of captured signals. This results in

an expansion of the timebase range from 2 ns/div to 62.5 ps/div. The MAGNIFY

keys also allow horizontal compression of up to 32 times so that full records of 8K

(32K optional) can be displayed on a single screen without loss of information.

The current magnification factor is temporarily displayed on the screen when you

are making a change. When the magnify function is active, the magnification

factor is permanently displayed on the screen.

In both analog and digital modes, the X POS control positions the trace with respect

to the screen to display the part of interest. When you adjust X POS, a bargraph is

temporarily displayed to show which part of the trace is currently being displayed.

XPOS

ST6672

Function of the timebase magnifier and X POS control

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 45

Key sequence:

Key pair to adjust the horizontal magnification.

MAGNIFY

Analog mode:

Right side switches x10 MAGNIFY on.

Left side switched x10 MAGNIFY off.

ST6711

Digital mode:

Right side increases the MAGNIFY factor.

Left side decreases the MAGNIFY factor.

MAGNIFY VERTICAL

Description:

In the digital mode the displayed signal(s) can be expanded vertically up to 32

times for detailed signal examination. Vertical magnification is activated in the

DISPLAY menu.

The TRACK control is then used to select the magnification factor in a x1, x2, x4

... x32 sequence. The selected factor is displayed in the DISPLAY menu. The

actual vertical deflection coefficient in V/div is automatically updated and

displayed in the text area at the bottom of the screen.

You can use the POS control of the displayed channel(s) to move the trace and

display the part of interest.

If you selected a trace stored in one of the memory locations m1 ... mn, using the

RECALL menu, to be displayed and magnified, you can change the position of

such magnified traces using the Y POS control as indicated in the RECALL menu.

POS

ST6671

Function of vertical magnifier and Y POS control

Key sequence:

TRACK

DISPLAY

Control to select the vertical magnification.

ST6759

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 46

FUNCTION REFERENCE

MAIN TIMEBASE

Description:

MANUAL + AUTOMATIC

The Main Timebase (MAIN TB) has a wide range of time/div settings. This

enables the display of signals of various frequencies to be displayed with optimum

resolution. The time scale is adjusted with the key pair TIME/DIV (VAR).

Adjustment can be done in steps or in a continuous range (VAR). Switching

between these modes is done by pressing both keys simultaneously. For low

frequency signals, the MAIN TB speed must be slow; this is obtained by pressing

the ’s’ side of the key pair. For high frequency signals, the ’ns’ side is pressed.

Time values of a signal can be determined as described under the ’screen

controls and graticule’ function. The AUTO RANGE key activates a continuous

automatic adjustment of the TIME/DIV of the main timebase. The result is a

display of between 2 and 6 waveform periods on the screen. This functions in

digital mode. For more information, refer to the AUTO RANGE function.

If AUTO RANGE is turned on when VAR is active, the timebase is changed in

such a way that the trace on display is kept unchanged.

In the digital mode, the timebase speeds are determined by an XTal oscillator.

VARiable control of the timebase speeds in digital mode happens in bigger steps

than in analog mode

AUTO

RANGE

TIME/DIV

ST6838

9312

Function of key pair TIME/DIV (VAR).

Key sequence:

TIME/DIV

VAR

Key pair to adjust the MAIN TB time scale for fine or

coarse steps

AUTO

RANGE

Toggle key to switch the AUTO RANGE function of main

timebase.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 47

MATHEMATICS

Description:

Two mathematical functions (MATH 1 and MATH 2) are independent waveform

processes. These can be used separately, or be chained together if required.

Each offers a choice of four mathematical functions (add, subtract, multiply, filter).

The result of each function is always placed in a separate register.

Independent operation allows two separate processes to be performed at the

same time. By placing the result of a mathematical function in a register memory,

it is possible to chain functions together. An example is Ch1xCh2 with its result

being filtered to remove noise. In this example, MATH 1 is the multiply function

with the product placed in m1 and MATH 2 is the filter process, filtering the

contents of m1 and placing its results in m2.

Appendix D gives the complete menu structure of the MATH menu.

When the oscilloscope has been delivered with the optional ‘MATH +’ menu, the

set of functions is expanded with integration, differentiation, Fast Fourier

Transformation (FFT) analysis, and histogram analysis processes. For more

details of these, see the separate MATH PLUS manual.

MEASURE MENU

Description:

In the digital mode the oscilloscope can perform two calculated measurements

(MEAS1 and MEAS2) simultaneously. These measurements are in addition to the

cursor measurements described under CURSORS. Each calculated

measurement can be individually selected. Once selected, the results are

automatically updated with each new signal acquisition and the result is displayed

in the top left corner of the screen.

Measurements can be performed on live signals or signals stored in any of the

registers. It is possible to perform measurements on the part of the waveform

between the two cursors. This function is called cursor-limited measurements and

is turned on via the key sequence MEASURE >> CURSOR LIMIT & STATIST >>

CURSOR LIMITED yes. Cursor operation is done via the TRACK and ∆ controls

and via the CURSOR menu.

There are three measurement dimensions: amplitude (volt), time, and delay. The

lower part of the menu reflects the type of measurement selected.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 48

FUNCTION REFERENCE

The following measurements are available:

volt:

dc, rms, min peak, max peak, pk-pk, low level, high level, overshoot

(positive and negative), preshoot (positive and negative)

frequency, period, pulse width, rise time, fall time, duty cycle

channel to channel on leading or trailing edges

time:

delay:

Refer to the functions TIME MEASUREMENT, VOLT MEASUREMENT, and

DELAY MEASUREMENT for more information.

Execution of these measurements can also be controlled by pressing the

command switch on the measuring probe in the TOUCH, HOLD & MEASURE

mode. (Refer to the appropriate function for more information.)

Appendix E gives the complete menu structure of the MEASURE menu.

All calculated measurements are made using the HISTOGRAM method. The

HISTOGRAM method is used to assure that measurements on signals with

distortion, overshoot, ringing, or noise, establish the most probable signal levels

as references for the 0 % and 100 % amplitude levels.

The next figure shows all parameters used in this method.

MAX

HIGH

90%

1st DISTAL

2nd DISTAL

2nd MESIAL

3rd DISTAL

50%

1st MESIAL

3rd MESIAL

1st PROXIMAL

3rd PROXIMAL

2nd PROXIMAL

10%

LOW

MIN

ST6743

All calculated measurements are made following a fixed sequence:

1. Using the HISTOGRAM algorithm, determine the HIGH-LOW levels and the

MIN-MAX levels. These parameters are used to define the 0% and 100%

voltage levels of the signal.

2. Calculate the MESIAL, DISTAL, and PROXIMAL levels. These voltage levels

are derived from the HIGH and LOW.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 49

3. Calculate all other signal parameters. The formulas for all time and volt

measurements are given in the sections for DELAY MEASUREMENT, TIME

MEASUREMENT, and VOLT MEASUREMENT.

The HISTOGRAM method determines the voltage levels. This method is as follows:

The input data (= trace) is used to create a histogram. This histogram

evaluates all signal amplitude values that occur in a given signal, plus the

number of occurrences for each amplitude value found in the trace. The

highest number of occurrences at the high end of amplitude range determines

the HIGH level, when the count is over 5% of the total number of samples.

Under the same condition, the highest count in the low end of the amplitude

range determines the LOW level..

If the 5% limit is not reached by any count, the HIGH level is set to the MAX level

and LOW is set to the MIN level. MAX and MIN are the highest and the lowest

detected amplitude levels. This occurs for example when the signal is a sinewave.

The DISTAL, MESIAL, and PROXIMAL level are now derived as follows:

DISTAL = 0.9 (HIGH-LOW)

MESIAL = 0.5 (HIGH-LOW)

PROXIMAL = 0.1 (HIGH-LOW)

Remote commands:

CPL: QM (Command to query a measurement)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

MULTIPLY (MATHEMATICS)

Description:

The MULTIPLY function performs a point-to-point multiplication of two traces. The

value of each data point is related to ground. The result of the MULTIPLY function

is a trace in a register.

The result trace can be scaled and positioned.

Scaling is the correction of the resulted trace to fit in the screen. The TRACK

control us used to adjust scaling.

Vertical positioning is called offset. It offsets each sample in the resulting trace

with a certain value so that the trace can be "moved" vertically. The ∆ control is

used to adjust vertical positioning.

The scale factor and the offset factor are displayed in the ‘MATH SCALE’ menu.

Pressing the ‘autoscale’ softkey automatically selects the settings for the trace to

fit in the screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 50

FUNCTION REFERENCE

Newly acquired traces or previously stored traces can be used as source for this

process and can be selected with the ∆ control. The resulting trace is

automatically written in a register memory (m1 for math1 or m2 for math2).

To see the result more clearly, use the ‘DISPLAY SOURCE on/off’ softkey to turn

off the two source traces.

One example of using the MULTIPLY function is the measurement of dissipated

power, by taking the voltage across a device and multiplying it by the current

through the same device.

Mathematical description:

Result = S1 x S2

Key sequence:

add

substract

multiply

filter

MATH

MATH1(2)

Control to select the MULTIPLY process.

Control to select the first source trace.

∆

Control to select the second source trace.

on off

Toggle softkey to switch the MULTIPLY function on.

SCALE

TRACK

∆

Control to adjust the scale factor.

Control to adjust the offset factor.

∆

auto

scale

Toggle softkey to select the autoscaling.

DISPLAY

SOURCE

yes no

Toggle softkey to switch the source traces on and off.

ST7271

9303

Remote commands:

CPL: QW (Command to query a waveform)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 51

PEAK DETECTION

Description:

This function is available only in the digital mode.

In the acquisition system of a Digital Storage Oscilloscope, the sample distance

is determined by the time base speed. At higher time base speeds, the distance

between the samples is short; at lower time base speeds, the sample distance is

longer.

To capture high frequency signals, or signal details of short duration, a high time

base speed is usually selected. A high time base speed captures a time ‘window’

that is usually equivalent to the length of the screen. So at higher time base

speeds, the time ‘window’ is shorter than at lower time base speeds.

Some applications require the time ‘window’ to be long. This is then achieved by

selecting a slow time base speed, to fit the requirement. But at lower time base

speeds, the time distance between the actual samples increases. The result is,

that signal details shorter than the sample distance will be missed.

The peak detection mode allows the Analog to Digital Convertors (ADC) to

operate at their highest speed, even when a lower time base speed has been

selected. The result is that, even at lower time base speeds, the maximum or

minimum peaks of the signals are placed in memory and displayed. This

technique is referred to as oversampling.

Using peak detection (PEAK DET) allows you to capture peak values of the input

signal which may otherwise occur between the samples. PEAK DET operates on

repetitive signals as well as on signals taken in a single acquisition.

The shortest events (or ‘glitches’) that can be captured are 5 ns in the single

channel mode and 10 ns in the dual channel mode. Selection of peak detection is

made from the ACQUIRE menu.

The following is an overview of peak detection possibilities:

Mode of use

Description

Peak detection speed

one channel

two channels

three channels

any channel

Ch1 & Ch2 or Ch3 & Ch4

ALT mode

5 ns

10 ns

CHOP mode

ALT mode

not applicable

10 ns

four channels

CHOP mode

not applicable

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 52

FUNCTION REFERENCE

See the function ACQUISITION LENGTH for additional information

SIGNAL

DETAIL

MAX SAMPLE RATE

EFFECTIVE SAMPLES

GLITCH OFF

MAX

EFFECTIVE SAMPLES

GLITCH ON

MIN

1 SAMPLE PERIOD

ST6660

Key sequence:

PEAK DET

ACQUIRE

Toggle key to switch the peak detection on/off.

ST6760

9303

POSITION

Description:

Position controls allow the signals to be shifted across the screen to align signals

with the measuring graticule to make time and voltage measurements.

Vertical positioning is done for each channel with the POS controls.

Horizontal positioning of all signals is done with the X POS control.

Key sequence:

POS

Control to adjust vertical position of a channel.

X POS

Control to adjust the horizontal position of all the channels

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 53

POWER SUPPLY

Description:

The instrument can be used at any nominal line voltage between 100 Vac and

240 Vac, with no switching and no fuse changes. After the instrument is turned on

by pressing the POWER ON/OFF switch, an automatic power-up test is started.

For detailed information, refer to the ’CONFIDENCE CHECK’ function.

The oscilloscope starts up with its previous settings when backup batteries are

installed. In the absence of batteries, the standard default setting ’std’ becomes

active. Refer to STANDARD FRONT for details.

Key sequence:

POWER ON OFF

Toggle key to switch the oscilloscope on/off.

PRINTING AND PLOTTING

Description:

In the digital mode a hard copy of the information on the CRT can be made to a

printer or a plotter. The hard copy can consist of trace(s), the trace settings, trace

identification, cursors, measurement results, and the screen graticule.

The oscilloscope and printer/plotter must be interconnected via a suitable cable

and must be set up to the correct interface parameters. The setup of the print or

plot action is made in the UTILITY >> PRINT & PLOT & CLOCK menu. The setup

of the interface parameters is made in the UTILITY >> REMOTE SETUP or the

UTILITY >> RS232 SETUP menu. This is described under the REMOTE

CONTROL IEEE 488.2 and RS-232 functions. The settings of the printer or plotter

are described in the manual that comes with the printer or plotter.

The front panel key HARDCOPY is used to start a print or plot. During the plot

action, the screen shows the message ‘HARDCOPY BUSY: ..% DONE,’ and

during a print or plot action, all front panel keys except HARDCOPY are inactive.

Pressing the HARDCOPY key again stops the hard copy action. Before

continuing, wait for the message ‘HARDCOPY DONE’.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 54

FUNCTION REFERENCE

Interface

The instrument is equipped with an RS-232 Interface as standard. This interface

can be used with an RS-232 printer or plotter.

The IEEE 488.2 Interface is available as factory installable option. This interface

can be used with IEEE-488 compatible printers or plotters.

For correct functioning, correct interface parameters must be set. This is done in

the menu UTILITY >> PRINT&PLOT&CLOCK.

Press the IEEE / RS232 softkey to select the IEEE or the RS232 interface.

Printer or plotter

This selects the menu to set up a printer or plotter being used.

Printer type

Supported printers: HP2225, FX80, LQ1500,

HPLASER (150 dpi), HP540 DeskJet or

compatibles. The TRACK control is used to make

the selection.

Plotter type

Supported plotters: HP7440, HP7550, HP7475A,

HP7470A, HPGL (Can be used to import

screenplots in a suitable word processing files),

PM8277, PM8278 and dump-m1. This selects a

trace dump to arbitrary waveform generator

PM5150. The dump action is started with the front

panel key HARD COPY or PLOT. Data transfer is

possible via RS232 or IEEE option. The TRACK

control is used to make the selection.

Layout

A submenu is provided to customize the output to the printer or plotter. This

submenu changes, depending on the printer or plotter that has been selected.

Grid

If ‘yes’, the complete grid (screen graticule) with

divisions is printed/plotted. If ‘no’, only the square

border in printed/plotted.

Paper size

This can be 11" or 12" for printer and A4 (A size) or

A3 (B size) for plotters.

Plot format (plotters only)

Trace information

This can be 1:1 and 2:1.

If ‘yes’, the settings readout and measuring results

are printed/plotted.

Colors (plotters only)

If ’yes’, the traces are plotted in different colors. If

‘no’, all traces are plotted in one color.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 55

Real-time clock

The real-time clock is used to make time stamps on a hardcopy. Hardcopies will

be stamped with two timestamps: the time of operation of the HARD COPY key

and the time of trigger of the acquisition.

Adjust block

Three softkeys are used to adjust the clock. The

softkey in the middle determines if the adjustment

is done for day, month, year, hour, minutes or

seconds. The item to be adjusted is displayed

intensified. The adjustment is done with the upper

and lower softkey. The upper softkey s gives an

increase, the lower softkey t a decrease.

Date format

Confirm

The date can be selected to be in the European

format (day:month:year), USA format

(month:day:year) or Japanese format

(year:month:day).

The adjusted time becomes active after pressing

the softkey ENTER & RETURN.

Key sequence:

plot clk

PRINT&

PLOT&CLK

UTILITY

Toggle softkey to select printer, plotter or

clock menu.

TRACK

Control to select printer (plotter) type.

Access to LAYOUT menu for printer or

LAYOUT

...

plotter.

IEEE

RS232

Toggle softkey to select IEEE or RS-232

interface (only visible if IEEE interface is

present).

ST7410

9312

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 56

FUNCTION REFERENCE

plot clk

PRINT&

PLOT&CLK

UTILITY

Toggle softkey to select printer, plot, or clock menu.

30:11:93

16:17:00

Toggle softkey to select the clock (time stamp) to be

adjusted with the up/down softkey pair.

Up/down softkey pair to adjust the time.

dd:mm:yy

mm:dd:yy

yy:mm:dd

Toggle softkey to select European, USA, or Japanese

format of the date.

ST7413

9312

GRID

yes no

PRINTER

LAYOUT

Toggle softkey to print the grid.

11"

12"

Toggle softkey to select paper length.

Toggle softkey to print trace information.

TRACE

info

yes no

ST6763

9303

GRID

yes no

PLOTTER

LAYOUT

Toggle softkey to plot the grid.

Toggle softkey to select paper size.

1:1

2:1

Toggle softkey to select plot format.

TRACE

INFO

yes no

Toggle softkey to plot trace information.

Toggle softkey to plot traces in colors.

COLORS

yes no

ST6764

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 57

PROBE UTILITIES

Description:

The ’PROBE SWITCH’ setting of the ’UTILITY >> PROBE’ menu determines the

instrument’s reaction when you press the command button on the probe. You can

select between the start of AUTOSET, performing a TOUCH, HOLD & MEASURE™,

selecting the next setup or switching between analog and digital mode.

For non-Fluke probes or probes without an indication ring, the attenuation factor

can be programmed. As a result, the combined input sensitivity of the probe and

oscilloscope is given in the readout area. The selections in the UTIL PROBE

CORR menu are reached via the key sequence ’UTILITY >> PROBE >> PROBE

CORR’. Attenuation factors 1:1, 10:1, 20:1, 50:1 and 100:1 can be selected. This

can be done for each channel individually.

Key sequence:

Softkey pair to select oscilloscope’s reaction

on pressing pushbutton on probe

Softkey pair to select for which channel the

probe attenuation is valid (ch1, ch2, ch3, ch4

or Ext Trig)

Softkey pair to select probe attenuation factor

(1:1, 10:1, 20:1, ...)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 58

FUNCTION REFERENCE

REMOTE CONTROL IEEE 488.2

Description:

An IEEE 488.2 Interface is available as an option. This interface can be used to

control oscilloscope functions by an external computer. All of the oscilloscope’s

current settings can be read by the computer.

The programming language is called SCPI (Standard Commands for

Programmable Instruments). SCPI is an IEEE standardized language designed

for remote control of programmable test and measuring equipment. General

information for SCPI and the instructions are located in a separate programming

manual. The 24-pole connector and its connections are shown in the figure below.

For correct functioning in a IEEE 488 environment, the oscilloscope’s device

address must be selected. This is done in the UTILITY REMOTE CONTRL menu

with the TRACK control. This menu is reached via the key sequence ’UTILITY >>

REMOTE CONTRL’. To change the IEEE settings, first select IEEE with the

’RS-232 IEEE’ softkey.

NDAC

DIO4 DIO2

SHIELD SRQ

DAV

EO1 DIO3

ATN IFC FD

DIO1

Operation of front key STATUS LOCAL

passes the control of the oscilloscope from

the interface (remote) to the front keys

(local).

GND GND

REN DIO7 DIO5

GND

LOGIC GND

GND 10

GND GND DIO8 DIO6

ST6064

Key sequence:

REMOTE

SETUP

TRACK

UTILITY

Control to select the IEEE device address.

ST6075

9303

STATUS

Key to switch from remote to local

LOCAL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 59

REMOTE CONTROL RS-232

Description:

The oscilloscope is equipped with an RS-232 Interface as standard. This can be

used for remote control or for setting the readout using an external controller or PC.

The language used is called CPL (Compact Programming Language) and is

described in Chapter 6. CPL is a small set of very powerful commands for full

remote control of all oscilloscope functions. The male 9-pin connector and its

connections are shown in the figure below.

For correct functioning Communication parameters must be adjusted. This is

done in the menu UTILITY RS-232 SETUP. This menu is reached via the key

sequence ’UTILITY >> RS-232 SETUP >> ......’. Possible Selections are:

Baud rate. To be selected with the TRACK control.

Number of DATAbits and PARITY. Combinations are

dataBITS:

PARITY:

Odd Even Odd Even No

There is always one stopbit.

Hardware handshake is selected with ’3-wire/7-wire’. In the 7 wire position the

hardware handshake signals DSR/DTR and CTS are active.

Software handshake is selected with ’XON-XOFF on off’.

TXD

RXD DTR

Operation of the front panel key STATUS LOCAL

passes the control of the oscilloscope from the

interface (remote) to the front panel keys (local).

RTS NC

DSR CTS

NC=NOT CONNECTED

ST6065

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 60

FUNCTION REFERENCE

Key sequence:

WITH IEEE:

REMOTE

SETUP

RS232

SETUP

UTILITY

RS232

SETUP

TRACK

BITS

Control to adjust baud rate.

NO IEEE

Toggle softkey to select number of

databits.

PARITY

no odd

even

Toggle softkey to select parity.

3 wire

7 wire

Toggle softkey to select hardware

handshake.

XON-XOFF

on off

Toggle softkey to select software

handshake.

ST6076

9303

STATUS

Key to switch from remote to local.

LOCAL

Remote commands:

CPL: PC (Command to program communication parameters)

GL (Has same result as operation of STATUS LOCAL key)

LL (Inhibits front key STATUS LOCAL)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 61

RUN/STOP

Description:

The RUN/STOP button operates in the digital mode only. When the STOP

function is active, any new signal acquisition is stopped and the trace is ‘frozen’.

The status of the STOP function is displayed in the bottom right side of the screen.

With the acquisitions STOPped, the following actions are still possible:

Plot actions

Display changes (also Y POS)

Cursor measurements

Calculated measurements

Mathematics and signal analysis

Settings of the acquisition system (actions that influence the contents of the

Data can be saved in memory

Front settings actions (also recalls)

Pressing the RUN/STOP key returns the oscilloscope to the acquisition mode that

was in effect before the key was pressed.

Key sequence:

RUN/STOP

Key to stop the acquisition and to freeze the trace and to

start the acquisition again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 62

FUNCTION REFERENCE

SCREEN CONTROLS AND GRATICULE

Description:

The screen controls are located to the left of the CRT viewing area.

Brightness of trace(s) and text can be adjusted separately with the TRACE

INTENSITY and TEXT INTENSITY controls. Intensity of the trace(s) can also be

determined by a voltage applied to the rear panel socket Z MOD. Refer to

’Characteristics’ Chapter 1 of the Reference Manual for input amplitudes.

The FOCUS control is used to optimize display sharpness.

A graticule is a provided with 1cm x 1cm divisions. Each vertical centimeter

equals the indicated channel sensitivity. A horizontal centimeter equals the

indicated timebase setting. The graticule has 0, 10, 90, and 100 % lines that can

be used for risetime measurements. For these, the signal peaks are exactly

positioned on the 0 and 100 % lines. The risetime of the pulse is readout between

the 10 and 90 % lines as shown in the following figure. Intensity of graticule

illumination is controlled with the GRATICULE ILLUMINATION control.

Trace alignment is done with the screwdriver operated TRACE ROTATION control.

TRACE

INTENSITY

TRACE

BRILLIANCE

TEXT

INTENSITY

TEXT

BRILLIANCE

100

TRACE

ROTATION

Screen controls and function of

TRACE ROTATION.

FOCUS

{

DISPLAY

SHARPNESS

GRATICULE

ILLUMINATION

CH1

20mV

MTB 0.2ms

GRATICULE

ILLUMINATION

MAT4216

9303

100

Rise time measurement using the graticule.

RISE

TIME

MAT4217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 63

Key sequence:

TRACE INTENSITY

Control for trace intensity.

TEXT INTENSITY

TRACE ROTATION

FOCUS

Control for text intensity.

Srewdriver operated control to align the trace with the

graticule

Control for focusing of trace, text and cursors.

GRATICULE

ILLUMINATION

Control for illumination intensity of measuring graticule

SCREEN MESSAGES

Description:

User messages show up in the center of the CRT viewing area. Messages warn

of incorrect settings and error conditions. The following table shows the important

messages.

Message

Meaning

Refer to function ’...’

ALWAYS PARITY IF 7 BITS

AUTOCAL...(approx4 min)

AUTOCAL NECESSARY

Always parity in case of 7 bits.

Function ’REMOTE CONTROL RS-232’.

Indicates that autocalibration has started.

Function ’CALIBRATION AUTOCAL’.

Indication that scope is out of its specified

temperature range and that an

autocalibration is necessary.

Function ’CALIBRATION AUTOCAL’.

AUTO SETTING...

Indicates that instrument performs an

autoset.

Function AUTOSET’.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 64

FUNCTION REFERENCE

AUTO SETTING (USERPROGRAM) Indicates that instrument performs an

userprogrammed autoset.

Function ’AUTOSET USERPROG’.

CALIBRATION COMPLETED

CALIBRATION ERROR ...

CH. 50Ω OVERLOAD

Autocalibration is completed.

Function ’CALIBRATION AUTOCAL’.

Autocal not successfully completed.

Function ’CALIBRATION AUTOCAL’.

Input voltage at 50Ω input impedance is

too high.

Function ’INPUT IMPEDANCE’

DESTINATION PROTECTED

FUNCTION ONLY IN ANALOG

MATH1 (2) is activated while register M1

(2) is protected.

Functions ’ADD’, ’FILTER’,

’MATHEMATICS’, ’MULTIPLY’ and

’SUBTRACT’.

Function activated in digital mode, but is

only present in analog mode.

Function ’ANALOG MODE’.

HARDCOPY ABORTED

HARDCOPY BUSY : ..% DONE

HARDCOPY DONE

Print or plot action has been aborted.

Function ’PRINTING AND PLOTTING’.

Instrument is busy with a print/plot action.

Function ’PRINTING AND PLOTTING’.

Print/plot or abort action has been done.

Function ’PRINTING AND PLOTTING’.

INVALID REGISTER SELECTION

INVALID SELECTION

Copying to the same register is not

possible.

Selected source is not valid.

FunSELECTIONctions ’ADD’, ’FILTER’,

’MATHEMATICS’, ’MULTIPLY’ and

’SUBTRACT’.

KEY INACTIVE WHEN STOPPED

NO AVERAGE IN ROLL MODE

NO BATTERY BACKUP

Pressed key is inactive when trace is

frozen.

Function ’RUN/STOP’.

Average and Roll modes cannot be

combined.

Function ’AVERAGE’ and TB MODE’.

Battery backup not possible because of

absence of batteries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

NO DTB, ACQ. TOO LONG

5 - 65

Del’d TB only possible at acquisition

length of 512 sample points.

Functions ’ACQUISITION LENGTH’ and

’DEL’D TB’.

NO DTB IN ROLL MODE

Del’d TB and Roll modes cannot be

combined.

Function ’DEL’D TB’ and ’TB MODE’.

NO ENVELOPE IN ROLL MODE

NO EVENT DELAY, DUAL SLOPE

NO EVENT DELAY IN TV MODE

NO IND WITH THIS COUPLING

Envelope and Roll modes cannot be

combined.

Function ’ENVELOPE’ and ’TB MODE’.

Event delay and dual slope cannot be

combined.

Function ’DELAY’.

Event delay and TV trigger mode cannot

be combined.

Function ’DELAY’ and ’TV TRIGGER’.

Trigger level indication not possible at dc

input coupling and ac or lf-rej trigger

coupling.

Function ’UTILITY SCREEN & SOUND.

NOT PART OF X VS Y REGISTER

X-source only possible out of chosen

Functions ’DISPLAY MENU’ and

’X-DEFLECTION’.

PLEASE FIRST SWITCH TO DSO

PLOT KEY = ABORT

Activated function only possible in digital

mode.

Function ’ANALOG/DIGITAL MODE’.

Indicates that the print/plot action can

only be aborted with PLOT key.

Function ’PRINTING AND PLOTTING’.

PRESS 2 SEC FOR AUTOCAL

PROBE DETECTED, NO CHANGE

CAL key must be pressed for more then

two sec to start autocalibration.

Function ’CALIBRATION AUTOCAL’.

The automatic probe detection overrules

manual selection when a probe with

indication ring is used.

Function ’PROBE UTILITIES’.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 66

FUNCTION REFERENCE

Recalling traces from an empty register is

not possible. Protection of an empty

Function ’RECALL’.

memory location.

Function ’SAVE’.

Trace cannot be saved in register M1 or

M2, because it is in use for a MATH

function.

Function ’MATHEMATICS’.

SETUP EMPTY

Recalling settings from an empty memory

location is not possible. Protection of an

empty front is impossible.

Function ’SETUPS’.

SETUP PROTECTED

Settings cannot be saved in protected

memory location.

Function ’SETUPS’.

STD SETUP = RECALL ONLY

TIME/DIV ADJUSTED

Save settings in the ’std’ front is not

possible.

Function ’SETUPS’.

Set timebase to fastest Roll mode

position.

FOR ROLL

Function ’TB MODE’.

TOO MANY TRACES

Maximum allowed traces is eight.

SETUPS

Description:

Ten complete front panel settings can be saved into a battery backed-up memory.

This feature is useful for routine measurements. Setups are stored in memory

location labeled s1 .... s10. These memories are accessible under the menu key

SETUPS. The menu structure is shown in Appendix H.

Selection of the memories s1 ... s10 is done with the TRACK control. Memory

location ’std’ is a factory-stored set of standard settings that can be used to put

the instrument in a defined state. For a detailed specification, refer to the

STANDARD FRONT function.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 67

save: The actual set of settings is saved in the selected memory location.

recall: The settings saved in the selected memory location become the actual

settings.

undo: The settings previous to the last recall action become active again.

CLEAR & PROTECT: in the CLEAR & PROTECT SETUPS submenu ’PROTECT

on off’ can be used to protect a memory location by prohibiting save actions to this

location.

clear all: in the CLEAR & PROTECT SETUPS submenu ’clear all’ leads to a

confirm menu. The memory locations s1 to s10 are emptied altogether when ’yes’

is selected. Selecting ’no’ stops the clear action.

Note:

Screen messages are given in the CRT viewing area when incorrect

commands are given and the action is prohibited. Example: When one

attempts to save settings to a protected memory location.

Key sequence:

TRACK

SETUPS

Settings memory selection.

save

recall

undo

Softkey to recall settings in selected memory

location

Softkey to recall settings from before the last recall

action

Softkey to save the actual front settings.

CLEAR&

Softkey that leads to a dedicated menu to switch

the memory protection of the settings and to clear

memory contents.

PROTECT

ST6766

9303

Remote commands:

CPL: SS (To save a front in a desired memory)

RS (To recall a front from a desired memory)

PT (To program text into a setup register)

QT (To query text from a setup register)

Refer to Chapter 6 for details

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 68

FUNCTION REFERENCE

SETUPS SEQUENCE

Description:

If front panel settings are stored in memory locations ‘s1 to s5’ and ‘s6’ is cleared,

then the range of ‘s1 to s5’ is referred to as a sequence. Such a sequence can be

used as (part of) a step-by-step testing procedure. There are two possible ways

to step through a sequence without have to recall each individual setup using the

menus:

By programming the AUTOSET key to be used as the ‘recall next setup’ key.

This selection can be done in the UTILITY >> AUTOSET menu.

By using a probe with a COMMAND switch. Each instrument is delivered with

two such probes, as standard accessory. The appropriate mode for this probe

command can be selected in the UTILITY >> PROBE menu.

To return to the ‘normal’ oscilloscope mode, recall the STANDARD SETUP by

simultaneously pressing the STATUS and TEXT OFF key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 69

STANDARD SETUP / FRONT PANEL RESET

Description:

A factory-programmed set of default settings is available to put the instrument in

a defined state. The default settings (std) are reached in the menu under the

SETUPS menu key. Another method to perform a front panel reset is by pressing

the STATUS and TEXT OFF keys simultaneously.

The TRACK control is used to Select ’std’ and the memories s1 ... s10 (refer to

SETUPS). The settings saved in ’std’ become the actual settings when the ’recall’

softkey is pressed.

The most important ’std’ settings are:

Analog mode.

AUTOSET USERPROG is set to ’off’.

Setting readout is switched on.

Ground indicator is set to ’on’.

Usertext is set to ’off’.

Cursors are ’off’.

Input is dc coupled and input impedance is 1 MΩ.

Input sensitivity is set to 50mV and VAR off.

CH1 is on. CH2, CH3, CH4 and EXT TRIG are off.

Vertical POS is set to center of screen.

MAIN TB on and X-DEFL ’off’.

MAIN TB in 1 ms and auto mode. VAR and 10x MAGNIFY are off.

MAIN TB triggering in edge, level-pp on, positive slope, ac coupled and trigger

source CH1.

Note:

Error messages appear in the CRT viewing area when incorrect

commands are given.

Key sequence:

TRACK

SETUPS

std memory selection

recall

softkey to recall ’std’ settings.

ST6767

9303

Remote commands:

CPL: DS (Command for a front panel reset).

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 70

FUNCTION REFERENCE

STATUS SCREEN

Description:

Normally a maximum of four lines of setting information are given in the lower

screen area. More extensive setting information can also be displayed. The

STATUS toggle key switches between normal and extensive settings information.

The status screen gives the following additional setting readouts:

Channel input coupling is indicated by AC, DC, or GND instead of symbols.

Settings of inactive channels are given in addition to the active channels.

Channel off or on is displayed.

The probe type is given for each channel.

A continuous indication of HOLD OFF, LEVEL MAIN TB and LEVEL DEL’D TB

is given.

MAIN TB and DEL’D TB trigger coupling are indicated.

The trigger position is displayed.

TV mode settings are displayed.

When the SAVE or RECALL menu is active, the STATUS SCREEN will show the

X and Y settings of the displayed traces.

Note:

The STATUS key has a third function when the oscilloscope is under

remote control. This second function is called ’go to LOCAL’ and is

indicated in small text below the STATUS key. For more information,

refer to the ’REMOTE CONTROL RS-232’ and ’REMOTE CONTROL

IEEE 488.2’ functions.

Key sequence:

STATUS

Toggle key to select amount of settings information on

screen

LOCAL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 71

SUBTRACT (MATHEMATICS)

The subtract mode is available in the digital mode of operation.

Description:

The SUBTRACT function performs a point-to-point subtraction of two traces.

Each point related to the respective ground levels (indicated as ‘-’). The result of

the SUBTRACT function is a new trace in a different register. This trace can be

scaled and positioned.

Scaling is the correction of the resultant trace to fit in the screen. Scaling can be

adjusted by using the TRACK control.

Vertical positioning is called offset. It offsets each sample in the resultant trace

with a certain value so that the trace can be "moved" vertically. It is adjusted with

the ∆ control.

The scale factor and the offset factor are displayed in the ‘MATH SCALE’ menu.

Pressing the ‘autoscale’ softkey automatically selects the settings for the trace to

fit the screen.

When subtracting signals with different amplitude settings, the size of the smaller

signal is automatically adjusted to match the size of the larger signal.

Newly acquired traces or previously stored traces can be used as the source for

this process and can be selected with the ∆ control. The resulting trace is

automatically written in a register memory (m1 for math1 or m2 for math2).

To see the result more clearly, you can turn off the two source traces by pressing

the ‘DISPLAY SOURCE on/off softkey’.

Mathematical description:

Result = S1 - S2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 72

FUNCTION REFERENCE

Key sequence:

add

substract

multiply

filter

MATH

MATH1(2)

Control to select the SUBTRACT process.

Control to select the first source trace.

∆

Control to select the second source trace.

on off

Toggle softkey to switch the SUBTRACT

function on.

SCALE

TRACK

∆

Control to adjust the scale factor.

Control to adjust the offset factor.

Toggle softkey to select the autoscaling.

∆

auto

scale

DISPLAY

SOURCE

yes no

Toggle softkey to switch the source traces

on and off.

ST7271

9303

Remote commands:

CPL: QW (Command to query a waveform)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

TEXT OFF

Description:

Toggle key to select information in the CRT viewing area. This way, more space

is available on screen for trace display. There are three steps in the cycle:

Softkey menu turned off.

Instrument settings turned off.

Both softkey menu and instrument settings turned on again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 73

Key sequence:

TEXT OFF

Toggle key to cycle through three states of information

given in CRT viewing area.

TIMEBASE MODES

Description:

The Main Timebase (MAIN TB) can function in three different modes : AUTO,

TRIG, or SINGLE. The choice is mainly determined by the frequency of the trigger

signal. The modes are explained below.

AUTO

In ‘auto’ mode, the MAIN TB always gives a display, even when

no signal is present. It checks for the occurrence of the trigger

signal for some 100 ms, but if none is found, it automatically

starts a new sweep or acquisition. On repetitive signals this mode

is most common except for signal frequencies lower than 10 Hz

where unstable displays will occur.

TRIG

In the triggered (trig) mode, traces are displayed only when the

MAIN TB is actually triggered by a signal. This mode is

recommended for frequencies lower than 10 Hz because it

assures a stable display. The ARM’D indicator indicates if no

trigger occurs.

SINGLE

In single shot mode, the MAIN TB runs only once after a trigger.

Pressing the SINGLE key resets the scope for single shot

operation; the trigger level is automatically set to 0.5 division

above ground (indicated by T-). The ARM’D indicator lights when

the MAIN TB is waiting for a trigger (MAIN TB armed). The single

mode is used to capture and observe (photograph) events that

happen only once.

In the digital mode the single mode can be used in combination with pre-triggering

to observe and store single events, along with signal information occurring before

the trigger point.

Auto, trig, and single can be chosen in the menu under the TB MODE menu key.

In the digital mode the TB MODE menu is expanded to include MULTI (only with

the optional MATH+ functions installed), ROLL and REAL TIME ONLY mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 74

FUNCTION REFERENCE

MULTI

Part of MATH+ option. Refer also to MATH+ Users Manual. The

MULTIple shot mode enables a number of single shot acquisitions

to be made in rapid succession. It is basically the same as SINGLE

but with automatic rearming following each acquisition. Each

acquired waveform is stored in a different memory location.

ROLL

In the ROLL mode, the MAIN TB can be used with sweep speeds

from 200 ms/div down to 200 s/div. Initially the trace fills the

screen from the right to the left. Once the screen is full, the trace

flows ‘through’ the screen from left to right. When ROLL is

selected, the TB MODE menu provides a ‘STOP ON TRIGGER’

choice. If this is set to ‘off’, the trace flows through the screen

continuously until you press the STOP key. If ‘STOP ON

TRIGGER’ is set to ‘on’, the trace stops when the scope is

triggered and the trigger point reaches the left of the screen.

REAL TIME

ONLY

In the digital mode the scope operates in random sampling mode

for sweep speeds 200 ns and faster. Setting ‘REAL TIME ONLY’

to ‘on’ means that these MAIN TB positions are inhibited. This

measuring errors on signals that are not truly repetitive or

identical. REAL TIME ONLY also inhibits alternating acquisitions

of MAIN TB and DEL’D TB.

Key sequence:

auto

trig

Softkey pair to select between auto, trig, single and

multi (optional).

single

multi

TB MODE

ROLL

on off

Toggle softkey to switch ROLL on and off.

ROLL

on off

STOP ON

TRIGGER

yes no

Toggle softkey to stop acquisition in ROLL mode on

a trigger.

REALTIME

ST6769

9303

ONLY

yes no

Toggle softkey to inhibit random sampling mode.

ARM’D

SINGLE

Key to reset MAIN TB in single shot mode, with

ARM’D indicator.

Remote commands:

CPL: AT (has same result as the operation of the SINGLE key)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 75

TIME MEASUREMENTS

Description:

Time measurements can be made using the cursors or using automated,

calculated measurement routines. Cursors operate in the analog mode as well as

in the digital mode.

Calculated time measurements are available in the digital mode only.

Using the cursors, three time interval readouts can be selected:

∆T gives the time interval (seconds) between the cursors.

1∆T gives an inverted readout of the time interval, and is read in Hz.

∆T-ratio gives a percentage (%) that can be reset by using the ∆T=100% softkey.

For more details, refer to CURSORS READOUT.

In the digital mode, the MEASURE menu accesses automatic time

measurements. This menu is reached via the key sequence ‘MEASURE >>

MEAS 1(2) >> time’. The TRACK control us used to select the type of

measurement and the ∆ control is used to select the waveform.

The result of the measurement is displayed in the top left corner of the screen.

PERIOD

PULSE

The following measurements are

DISTAL

possible:

(Refer to section MEASURE MENU

MESIAL

for details of signal parameters).

PROXIMAL

1−

ST6744

RISE

FALL

freq (FREQUENCY).

Measures the reciprocal of the PERIOD of the signal. Frequency is calculated

between the first and third mesial of the signal. At least one complete signal

period must be acquired to get a valid measurement.

freq =

time of 3rd mesial - time 1st mesial

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 76

FUNCTION REFERENCE

period (PERIOD).

Measures the time between the first and third mesial of the signal. At least one

complete signal period must be acquired to get a valid measurement.

period = time of 3rd mesial - time of 1st mesial

pulse (PULSE WIDTH).

Measures the minimum time of the positive part and negative part of the first

period of the signal. At least one complete signal period must be acquired to

get a valid measurement.

pulse = min {(time 2nd mesial- time 1st mesial) pos part of signal period},

{(time 2nd mes- time 1st mes) neg part of signal period}

Note that the part with the shortest duty cycle is always defined as ‘pulse’.

rise (RISE TIME).

Measures the rise time of a signal. It is calculated between the proximal and

distal of the first rising slope of the input signal. At least one rising slope must

be displayed on the screen to get a valid measurement.

rise = time of distal of first rising slope - time of proximal of first rising slope

fall (FALL TIME).

Measures the fall time of a signal. It is calculated between the proximal and

distal of the first falling slope of the input signal. At least one falling slope must

be displayed on the screen to get a valid measurement.

fall =

time of proximal of first falling slope - time of distal of first falling slope

duty (= DUTY CYCLE).

Measures the percentage time of the positive part of the first period of the signal

as compared to the period time. At least one complete signal period must be

acquired to get a valid calculation.

2nd mesial of pos part - 1st mesial of pos part

duty =

100%

time of 3rd mesial - time 1st mesial

It is possible to perform measurements on the part of the waveform between the

two cursors. This function is called cursor-limited measurements and is turned on

via the key sequence MEASURE >> CURSOR LIMIT & STATIST >> CURSOR

LIMITED yes. Cursor operation is done via the TRACK and ∆ controls and via the

CURSOR menu.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 77

Results of the measurements MEAS1 and MEAS2 are displayed in the top left

corner of the screen. When you press the key sequence MEASURE >> CURSOR

LIMIT & STATIST >> STATIST on, the screen displays three values per MEAS

function. These values are measured over the total number of acquisitions for that

particular measurement and are updated instantly. The statistic measurement

values are as follows:

absolute minimum value

absolute maximum value

mean value

Key sequence:

volt

time

delay

MEASURE MEAS1(2)

Toggle softkey to select time measurements in menu

MEAS1 or MEAS 2.

TRACK

Control to choose the time measurement.

∆

Control to select the signal on which the measurement

must be made.

on off

Toggle softkey to switch the measurement on and off.

CURSOR

LIMIT

yes no

CURSOR

LIMIT&

STATIST

Toggle softkey to switch cursor limited measurements

on and off.

STATIST

on off

Toggle softkey to switch the statist function on and off.

ST6770

9312

Remote commands:

CPL: QM (Command to query a measurement)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 78

FUNCTION REFERENCE

TOUCH, HOLD & MEASURE ™ MODE

Description:

The TOUCH, HOLD & MEASURE.™ mode is a quick way to freeze the trace and

to display four main measurements instantly. This is done by pressing the

COMMAND switch on the measuring probe of the required channel.

The four measurements are: dc voltage level, peak-to-peak value, rms value, and

frequency. The four values are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen.

This function is a fast and easy way of troubleshooting. The COMMAND switch is

always where it should be: near the place to be measured (not on the

oscilloscope). This feature enables accurate signal probing and display freezing

without having to reach and touch the oscilloscope control.

NOTE: The ‘PROBE SWITCH’ setting of the ‘UTILITY >> PROBE’ menu must

first be set to ‘q.meas’ in order to obtain a reading on the oscilloscope

when you press the COMMAND switch on the measuring probe.

Press the COMMAND switch again to go to RUN mode. TOUCH, HOLD &

MEASURE ™ results are deleted from display.

Key sequence:

Toggle softkey to select the TOUCH, HOLD &

MEASUREMENT ™ mode reaction of the oscilloscope on

pressing the COMMAND switch on the measuring probe.

COMMAND

ST6771

COMMAND switch on the measuring probe to activate

and leave the TOUCH, HOLD & MEASURE ™ mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 79

TRIGGER COUPLING

Description:

Trigger coupling is used to optimize the trigger stability for different signal types.

The filter modes ac and dc are identical to those of the vertical inputs. Refer to

function INPUT COUPLING.

Lf-reject cuts off lower frequencies; triggering occurs on signals between 30 kHz

and full bandwidth.

Hf-reject cuts off higher frequencies; triggering occurs on signal frequencies lower

then 30 kHz. The following figure explains ac, lf-reject, and hf-reject.

Noise ’on’ improves trigger stability for noisy signals. By enlarging the trigger gap

(of MAIN TB and DEL’D TB) the triggering becomes less sensitive to noise.

The MAIN TB trigger coupling can be selected in the menu under the TRIGGER

menu key. For DEL’D TB, the menu under the DTB menu key is used; the

selection is possible in ’triggered’ mode (ch1, ch2 and ext trig) only.

ac-coupled

lf-reject

hf-reject

0dB

−3dB

10Hz

FULL

BANDWITH

FULL

BANDWITH

FULL

BANDWITH

30kHz

FREQ.

MAT4218

Effect of trigger coupling modes

Presence of trigger level indicators (T-, D-) as a function of trigger coupling and

other oscilloscope settings:

Trigger

Vertical

Trigger level indicator

coupling

input coupling

lf-rej

hf-rej

off

all settings

off

if level-pp is on

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 80

FUNCTION REFERENCE

Key Sequence:

ac dc

lf-rej

hf-rej

Toggle softkey to select MAIN TB trigger coupling modes ac, dc,

lf-reject, and hf-reject.

TRIGGER

noise

on off

Toggle softkey to switch ’noise’ mode for MAIN TB/DEL’D TB.

ST6772

9303

ac dc

lf-rej

Toggle softkey to select DEL’D TB trigger coupling modes ac, dc,

lf-reject and hf-reject. Not selectable when ’starts’ is active in the

menu under the DTB key.

hf-rej

DTB

ST6773

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 81

TRIGGER DEL’D TB

Description:

The Delayed Timebase has two operating modes: starts and triggered. In both

modes the main timebase must be triggered first, and the delay time must have

expired. The Del’d Time Base modes are selected in the DELAYED TIMEBASE

menu after switching the delayed timebase on.

In the "STARTS" mode, the DEL’D TB starts immediately after the DELAY time.

This is explained under DEL’D TB. When signal jitter is present, the effect will be

magnified by using the DEL’D TB. The jitter is eliminated by changing from the

‘starts’ to the triggered mode. The start of the DEL’D TB sweep is then ‘postponed’

to the first DEL’D TB trigger after the delay time.

The triggered mode is activated in the DELAYED TIMEBASE menu by selecting

the trigger source (ch1, ch2 and ext trig). For stable triggering, the DEL’D TB

trigger level must be adjusted to a proper level. The trigger level for the Del’d Time

Base is adjusted with the ∆ control. The figure shows the difference between

‘starts’ and ‘trig’d’.

For more explanation of trigger functions, refer to ‘TRIGGER MAIN TB’ function.

For details about trigger coupling, see the appropriate section.

DTB START DIRECTLY AFTER DELAY TIME (STARTS)

DELAY

DELAY TIME

DEL’D TB ‘starts’ and

‘trig’d’ modes

DTB START AFTER DELAY TIME UPON TRIGGER PULSE (CH1...CH4)

WAITING FOR TRIGGER

DELAY

DELAY TIME

DTB

TRIGGER

MAT4214

The DEL’D TB trigger source and slope can be selected when:

The menu is active.

The ‘trig’d’ mode is selected.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 82

FUNCTION REFERENCE

Source and slope are selected with the same TRIG 1, TRIG .., and EXT TRIG

keys that are used for the main timebase trigger source and slope selection. The

delayed timebase source and slope have their own readout. This readout can be

found at the bottom right corner of the screen, below the readout for the main

timebase trigger source and slope.

If the channel and trigger coupling are the same (e.g., both ac or both dc), the

trigger level is indicated on the screen by D-.

For more details refer to the DEL’D TB section.

Key sequence:

DEL’D TB

on off

DTB

Toggle softkey to switch DEL’D TB ’on’.

starts

trig’d

Toggle softkey to select the DEL’D TB trigger mode.

∆

Control to adjust the DEL’D TB trigger level.

lf-rej

hf-rej

Toggle softkey to select the DEL’D TB trigger coupling modes ac, dc,

lf- reject and hf- reject.

ST6774

9303

TRIGGER LEVEL

Description:

LEVEL selects the signal level at which the timebase will trigger. For triggering,

the level must be within the peaks of the signal.

TRIGGER LEVEL sets the trigger level for the main timebase. In level-pp ’on’

mode, the level range is clamped within the peak-peak values of the signal. Then

the MTB will always be triggered as shown in the following figure. When level-pp

is ’off’, the level range is from -8 ... +8 divisions.

Leveling in DEL’D TB is adjusted with the ∆ control. It is activated in the triggered

DEL’D TB mode. The range is from -8 ... +8 divisions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 83

Leveling in DEL’D TB is adjusted with the ∆ control. It is activated in the triggered

DEL’D TB mode. The range is from -8 ... +8 divisions.

Trigger levels for MAIN TB and DEL’D TB can be displayed. Refer to the

description of the UTILITY SCREEN & SOUND function.

ARM’D

TRIGGER

LEVEL

TRIGGER

LEVEL

TRIGGER

LEVEL

RANGE

TIME BASE

TRIGGERED

PEAK PEAK

SIGNAL

VALUE

ARM’D

level −pp

off

ST6791

TRIGGER LEVEL control ranges in level-pp on and off

Key sequence:

TRIGGER

LEVEL

Control for MAIN TB trigger level.

level-pp

on off

TRIGGER

DTB

Toggle softkey to switch MAIN TB level-pp on and off.

Control for DEL’D TB trigger level.

starts

trid’d

∆

ST6775

9303

Remote commands:

CPL: TA (Command for trigger Acquisition)

Refer to chapter 6 for more details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 84

FUNCTION REFERENCE

TRIGGER MAIN TB

Description:

This section deals only with ‘edge’ triggering of the MAIN TB. For TV triggering,

Logic triggering or DEL’D TB triggering, refer to the appropriate sections.

In the analog mode triggering determines the start point of the MAIN TB sweep.

The sweep starts at the moment the signal crosses the trigger level in positive or

negative direction. The slope is selectable (

), as is shown in the figure below.

In the digital mode, the trigger system determines which part of the trace is

acquired and placed in memory. As in every other Digital Storage Oscilloscope,

signal acquisition through the ADC system is a continuous process, until it is

stopped by the trigger signal. If nothing else would be done, the signal placed in

memory would be the signal prior to the trigger moment and the trigger moment

would be displayed at the end of the screen. For most oscilloscope users this

would be confusing, since most users were taught that the trigger point

determines the beginning of a sweep (as is the case for an analog scope).

Therefore, in actuality, a delay time equivalent to the time of one sweep length is

added, so that it appears as if the trigger moment is displayed at the beginning of

the screen.

The TRIGGER POSITION control allows you to change the time delay between

the trigger point and the digital acquisition. If set to zero, the acquisition is stopped

after a time equivalent to one sweep length has been added so that the trigger

point appears at the beginning of the trace.

Any of the inputs can be used as the trigger source. The source is selected with

the keys ‘TRIG1, TRIG.. or EXT TRIG’ in the respective control sections. The

same keys are used to toggle between the positive ( ) and negative ( ) slope.

In the digital mode, dual slope ( ) is available. The oscilloscope must be set to

’REAL TIME ONLY’ = yes in the TB MODE menu. Dual slope triggering can be

selected only by the TRIGGER menu key and is restricted to the single shot

modes. The medium level is adjusted by the TRIGGER LEVEL knob. The trigger

gap between positive and negative slope is adjusted by the TRACK knob. For line

frequency related signals, a Line trigger source is available. The Line trigger

source is selected by a softkey under the TRIGGER menu key. The External

Trigger input provides an extra trigger input. This input can be used as the trigger

source for the Main TimeBase (MTB) and Delayed Time Base (DTB). The input

characteristics are simular to the input channels. To reduce the effect on triggering

on noisy signals, trigger filters can be used. For this, lf-rej or hf-rej can be

selected.

Refer to TRIGGER COUPLING and TRIGGER LEVEL for details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 85

The MAIN TB trigger settings are selected in the menu under the TRIGGER menu

key. The toggle softkey ‘ch...line’ selects the trigger source in combination with the

keys TRIG1, TRIG.. and EXT TRIG that give direct front panel access to select

the trigger source. This is combined with the slope selection.

SLOPE:

POSITIVE

SLOPE:

NEGATIVE

TRIGGER

LEVEL

WAVEFORM

ON SCREEN

WAVEFORM

ON SCREEN

SLOPE:

NEGATIVE

TRIGGER

LEVEL

SLOPE:

POSITIVE

WAVEFORM

ON SCREEN

WAVEFORM

ON SCREEN

ST6749

Function of TRIGGER LEVEL and slope

Key sequence:

Toggle softkey to select edge or TV triggering. In digital mode

also logic triggering.

Toggle softkey to select positive or negative trigger edge (slope).

In digital mode also dual slope.

Toggle softkey to select MAIN TB trigger source. CH1 to CH4 are

to be selected with TRIG1 to TRIG4.

. . TRIG . .

Toggle key to select CH1, CH.. or EXTTRIG as MAIN TB

trigger source. Subsequent key presses cause the trigger

slope to change between positive and negative trigger

edge.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 86

FUNCTION REFERENCE

TV TRIGGER

Description:

In addition to edge and glitch triggering (explained under TRIGGER MAIN TB),

there are extensive video triggering possibilities. These enable stable triggering

on video frames and lines from various TV standards. There is no need to adjust

the trigger level.

Triggering is possible on video signals with positive (pos) or negative (neg) signal

polarity. Supported video standards include NTSC, PAL, SECAM, and HDTV. For

HDTV systems a three- level sync trigger is used, and the line count of the system

may be selected.

The MAIN TB can be triggered on a TV line (all lines are superimposed), or field

1 or field 2 of any of the four channels. In the field mode, the TRACK control can

be used select triggering on any specific TV line for individual line display.

The TV trigger settings are selected from the menu under the TRIGGER menu

key. TV trigger is not available when the optional External Trigger is selected as

trigger source.

Note:

A trigger edge can not be selected

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 87

Key sequence:

Toggle softkey to switch between edge and tv triggering.

In digital mode also glitch triggering.

Toggle softkey to switch between TV triggering on field 1,

field 2, or line sync pulses.

Control to select the line number.

Toggle softkey to select between pos(itive) and

neg(ative) signal polarity.

Softkey pair for video system selection.

Softkey pair for selection of max. number of HDTV lines.

Selects the channel and toggles between pos(itive) and

neg(ative) signal polarity (no edge selection)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 88

FUNCTION REFERENCE

USERTEXT

Description:

Two lines of user-definable text can be displayed in the CRT viewing area. The

text may be useful as additional information when taking photographs. The

selections are reached via the key sequence ’UTILITY >> SCREEN & SOUND >>

USERTEXT >> on’.

The EDIT USER TEXT menu gives the following editing modes:

The TRACK control determines the position where text has to be edited. The

position is indicated by a flashing cursor.

The ∆control is used for character selection.

Softkey ’space’ changes the character under the cursor into a space.

Softkey ’delete’ erases text under the cursor.

Softkey ’insert’ adds a space under the cursor.

Key sequence:

SCREEN&

SOUND

USER

TEXT

on off

UTILITY

Toggle softkey to activate user text.

TRACK

Control to determine the position where

text has to be edited.

∆

Control to determine the character to be

added.

space

delete

insert

Softkey to make space.

Softkey to delete a character.

Softkey to insert a character.

ST6085

9303

Remote commands:

CPL: PT (command to program user text)

QT (command to query user text)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 89

UTILITY MAINTENANCE

Description:

The UTILITY MAINTENANCE menu is used to calibrate the oscilloscope and for

repair and testing. Calibration data is protected by a password and by operation

of a pinhole switch that can be sealed. Calibration is of vital importance for the

instrument’s high accuracy. The menu is meant for calibration and for use by

service technicians, and is therefore not explained in this Users Manual.

An extensive description can be found in the Service Manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 90

FUNCTION REFERENCE

UTIL MENU

Description:

The UTIL menu is used to make presettings for instrument settings that do not

need to be changed frequently:

The operation of the AUTOSET key. For a description, refer to the AUTOSET

and AUTOSET USERPROG functions.

Selections in relation to probes. Refer to PROBE UTILITIES function for details.

Amount of information in CRT viewing area and audio signals. Refer to the

UTILITY SCREEN & SOUND function. The UTILITY SCREEN & SOUND

menu has a dedicated submenu for usertext. See the USERTEXT function for

more information.

Presettings for the remote control interfaces. Refer to REMOTE CONTROL

RS-232 and REMOTE CONTROL IEEE 488.2

Presetting for suitable printer or plotter and real time clock adjustment.

Settings for maintenance and repair such as tests and calibration data. Data

affecting the instrument’s accuracy can only be changed by entering a

password. This is explained in detail in the Service Manual.

The UTILITY menu is reached via the UTILITY menu key. The following figure

shows the structure of the UTILITY menu related to instrument operation.

Key sequence:

UTILITY

AUTOSET

...

Access to AUTOSET programming.

PROBE

Access to PROBE functions.

SCREEN&

SOUND

Access to UTILITY SCREEN & SOUND functions.

RS232

SETUP

(’REMOTE CONTROL’ when IEEE 488 option is present)

Access to interface settings (REMOTE functions).

PRINT&

PLOT&CLK

Access to PRINT & PLOT & CLOCK settings menu.

MAINTE-

NANCE

Access to UTILITY MAINTENANCE functions (for service

technicians only).

ST6779

9312

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 91

UTILITY SCREEN & SOUND

Description:

The UTILITY SCREEN & SOUND menu is used to select on-screen text, trigger

and ground level indicators, and user text. Settings for acoustic feedback (beep

and click) are set in this menu. The menu can be reached with the key sequence

’UTILITY >> SCREEN & SOUND’.

The following selections are possible:

Trigger level indicators (TRIG IND) for MAIN TB and DEL’D TB. Level-pp and

TV mode must be off. The horizontal marker is the level position.

Ground level indicators (GND IND) for each channel are visible only when

channel is on. The horizontal line is the ground level position.

MAIN TB-int contrast between MAIN TB trace and intensified part is adjusted

with the TRACK control.

USERTEXT leads to a submenu for usertext. Refer to the function

USERTEXT for more information.

The following audio signals are activated with the key sequence ’UTILITY >>

SCREEN & SOUND >> SOUND’:

BEEP on off, the signal sounds to indicate messages or AUTOSET.

CLICK on of, the signal indicates operation of keys and rotary controls.

Key sequence:

TRIG IND

on off

SCREEN&

SOUND

UTILITY

Toggle softkey to display trigger level

indication.

GND IND

on off

Toggle softkey to display ground level

indication.

BEEP

on off

SOUND

Toggle softkey to select warning signal.

CLICK

on off

Toggle softkey to select rotary control/key

operation signal.

TRACK

Control to adjust the intensity ratio in ’mtbi’

mode.

USERTEXT

...

Access to editing menu for USERTEXT.

ST6087

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 92

FUNCTION REFERENCE

VOLT MEASUREMENTS

Description:

Voltage measurements can be made using the cursors or using automated,

calculated measurement routines. Cursors operate in the analog mode as well as

in the digital mode.

Calculated volt measurements are available in the digital mode only.

Using the cursors, three voltage readouts can be selected:

∆V gives the voltage difference between the cursors.

V1&V2 gives the absolute voltage with respect to ground for each cursor.

∆V-ratio gives a percentage that can be reset by using the ∆V=100% softkey.

For more details refer to the section CURSOR READOUT.

In the digital mode, the MEASURE menu provides automatic voltage

measurements.

This menu is reached via the key sequence ‘MEASURE >> MEAS 1(2) >> volt’.

The TRACK control is used to select the type of measurement, and the ∆ control

is used to select the waveform.

The result of the measurement is displayed in the top left corner of the screen.

PRESHOOT

OVERSHOOT

MAX

HIGH

The following

measurements are possible:

(Refer to section MEASURE

RMS

PKPK

MENU for details of signal

parameters).

LOW

1−

MIN

UNDERSHOOT

ST6670

dc (DC VOLTAGE)

Measures the absolute dc level, related to the ground level of the signal. This

is the average voltage of all samples in one period. If no full period is present,

all input samples in the signal are included in the calculation.

-------------------

dc =

×S(n)

k – j + 1

where:

j = 1st mesial crossing [first sample if no full period]

k = 3rd mesial crossing [last sample if no full period]

S(n) = nth sample (j<=n<=k)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 93

rms (ROOT MEAN SQUARE VOLTAGE)

Measures the rms value within one period, related to the ground level of the

signal. If no full period is present, all input samples are included in the

calculation.

-------------------

rms =

×S(n)

k – j + 1

where:

j = 1st mesial crossing [first sample if no full period]

k = 3rd mesial crossing [last sample if no full period]

S(n) = nth sample (j<=n<=k)

min (MINIMUM VOLTAGE)

Measures the minimum voltage level of the signal, including undershoot. It is

calculated over all samples of the displayed signal.

min = min {S(n)}

where:

S(n) = nth sample

max (MAXIMUM VOLTAGE)

Measures the maximum voltage level of the signal, including overshoot. It is

calculated over all samples of the displayed signal.

max = max {S(n)}

where:

S(n) = nth sample

pkpk (PEAK-TO-PEAK VOLTAGE)

Measures the peak-to-peak voltage (the difference between the absolute

minimum voltage and absolute maximum voltage of the signal).

pkpk = max - min

low (LOW LEVEL)

Measures the low level of the signal. The number of samples for each

amplitude level is counted. A peak in the number of samples at one level

indicates the low level and is referred to 0% level. If no such point is present

(e.g., sine wave), it is equal to the minimum voltage.

high (HIGH LEVEL)

Measures the high level of the signal. The number of samples at each

amplitude level is counted. A peak in the number of samples at one level

indicates the high level and is referred to the 100% level. If no such point is

present (e.g., sine wave), the high level is equal to the maximum voltage.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 94

FUNCTION REFERENCE

oversh (OVERSHOOT)

Measures the overshoot (in %), related to the amplitude of the signal. There are

two types of overshoot: rising overshoot and falling overshoot (undershoot).

max (of 1st rising slope) -high

rising oversh =

falling oversh =

100%

high - low

low - min (of 1st falling slope)

high - low

100%

presh (PRESHOOT)

Measures the preshoot (in %), related to the amplitude of the signal. There are

two types of preshoot: rising preshoot and falling preshoot.

low - min (of 1st rising slope)

rising presh =

falling presh =

100%

high - low

max (of 1st falling slope) -high

high - low

100%

It is possible to perform measurements on the part of the waveform between the

two cursors. This function is called cursor limited measurements and is turned on

via the key sequence MEASURE >> CURSOR LIMIT & STATIST >> CURSOR

LIMITED yes. Cursor operation is done via the TRACK and ∆ controls and via the

CURSOR menu.

Results of the measurements MEAS1 and MEAS2 are displayed in the top left

corner of the screen. When you press the key sequence MEASURE >> CURSOR

LIMIT & STATIST >> STATIST on, the screen displays three values per MEAS

function. These values are measured over the total number of acquisitions for that

particular measurement and are updated instantly. The statistic measurement

values are as follows:

absolute minimum value

absolute maximum value

mean value

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 95

Key sequence:

volt

time

delay

Toggle softkey to select time measurements in menu

MEAS1 or MEAS2.

MEASURE MEAS1(2)

TRACK

Control to choose the volt measurement.

∆

Control to select the signal on which the measurement

must be done.

on off

Toggle softkey to switch the measurement on and off.

CURSOR

LIMIT&

STATIST

CURSOR

LIMITED

yes no

Toggle softkey to switch cursor limited measurements

on and off.

STATIST

on off

Toggle softkey to switch the statist function on and off.

ST6780

9312

Remote commands:

CPL: QM (Command to query a measurement)

Refer to Chapter 6 for full details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 - 96

FUNCTION REFERENCE

X-DEFLECTION (X-DEFL, X vs Y)

Description:

X-deflection creates X-Y displays in which one input signal is displayed as

function of another. To obtain X-Y displays in the analog mode, the oscilloscope

can be set to X-DEFLection mode. In the digital mode a similar function is called

X vs Y mode. In both cases a display of amplitude vs amplitude instead of the

display of amplitude vs time is visible.

In the analog mode, X-DEFL uses a signal from one of the input channels for

horizontal direction. Also the line voltage or EXT TRIG channel can be used for

X-deflection. Any of the input channels can be selected for vertical deflection.

In the digital mode, X vs Y also uses a signal from one of the input channels.

X vs Y displays can also be displayed from signals previously stored in memory.

In this case the memory register (e.g., m3) must first be selected with the TRACK

control. The horizontal deflection source can then be any of the active trace

registers (e.g., m3.2).

The selections are made in the DISPLAY menu under the X-DEFL or X vs Y menu

softkey. After the function is switched ‘on’, the source selection becomes visible.

In all cases the active X deflection source is displayed at the bottom right of the

screen and the Y deflection source(s) at the bottom left of the screen.

To achieve correct scaling and positioning, use the channel AMPL front panel key

pair, their POS controls and the XPOS control in the analog mode. For the digital

mode, use the VERT MAGNIFY under the DISPLAY menu and the XPOS control.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION REFERENCE

5 - 97

Key sequence:

Toggle softkey to switch X- Deflection on.

Softkey pair to select X-DEFL source. Selection is

possible only with X- DEFLection on.

DIGITAL MODE:

on off

DISPLAY

X vs Y

Toggle softkey to switch X vs Y on.

TRACK

Control to select the register as source for vertical

deflection. Selection is possible only with X vs Y on.

X-SOURCE

Softkey pair to select source for horizontal deflection.

Selection is possible only with X vs Y on.

ST6782

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 1

6 THE CPL PROTOCOL

6.1 INTRODUCTION

The oscilloscope can be controlled via the RS-232 serial interface using the

Compact Programming Language (CPL) protocol. In this protocol a small but very

powerful set of commands is defined.

The main characteristics of the CPL protocol:

It is kept simple and straightforward and is fully tailored to use simple

communication facilities like those of BASIC.

Special emphasis is put on the ease of programming:

easy input format with a ’forgiving’ syntax:

Commands always consist of two characters that can be

case.

upper or lower

Parameters that sometimes follow the command may be separated from

one or more

it by

separation characters.

strict and consistent output format:

Alpha character responses are always in UPPERCASE.

Parameters are always separated by only one comma ("," = ASCII 44).

Responses always end with a carriage return (CR = ASCII 13).

synchronization between input and output

After receipt of every command, CPL returns an acknowledge character

and a carriage return (CR = ASCII 13), to indicate reception and/or

execution of the command.

Commands

All commands consist of a header of two alpha characters. Some of the

commands are followed by parameters to give the oscilloscope more information.

The parameters are separated from one another by a PROGRAM DATA

SEPARATOR <pds>. At the end of the complete command (i.e., header and

parameters) comes the PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR CR. After the CR

is recognized by the oscilloscope, the command will be executed. Then an

<acknowledge> and CR is sent to signal the end of the command processing.

Notes: - Literal characters are placed between double quotes, e.g. "AS".

- Literal characters may be specified in upper and lower case.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 2

THE CPL PROTOCOL

There are several IMPLICIT QUERY commands, which means that the

oscilloscope will send data back (i.e., respond) to the computer after receiving

and executing the command.

Acknowledge

The <acknowledge> is an automatic response from the oscilloscope to let the

computer know that the received command has been executed. The

<acknowledge> also contains information about how the command was

executed.

An <acknowledge> is always followed by a CR. For more information, see section

6.6 ACKNOWLEDGE.

Responses

The format of the response data depends on the command which invoked the

response. When several values or strings are returned they are always separated

with a RESPONSE DATA SEPARATOR which is a comma ("," = ASCII 44). To

signal the end of the response a RESPONSE MESSAGE TERMINATOR

CR (ASCII 13) is sent.

Data Separators

Data Separators are used between parameters sent to the oscilloscope and

between values and strings received back from the oscilloscope. The following list

gives the possibilities for data separators:

program data separator

space SP (ASCII 32)

)

tab

HT (ASCII 9)

(ASCII 44)

comma ,

) more than one space or more than one tab can be used as a

separator

response data separator

comma ,

(ASCII 44)

Message Terminators:

At the end of a command or response a terminator must be sent. For both

programming and response messages the terminator has been defined as:

program message terminator

carriage return CR (ASCII 13)

response message terminator

carriage return CR (ASCII 13)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 3

6.2 EXAMPLE PROGRAM FRAME

In the COMMAND REFERENCE SECTION a very short programming example is

given for each command. All examples are written in GW-Basic and able to run

on an IBM-compatible PC. The example program expects the oscilloscope to be

connected via COM1 port (RS-232) with a RS-232 null modem cable and to be

setup at 9600 baud, 8 databits, no parity, 3 wire, xon/xoff = off (Menu UTILITY).

The following program lines are an example frame work. The frame work lets you

embed any of the example programs shown in the COMMAND REFERENCE

SECTION.

Program frame:

10 OPEN "COM1:9600,N,8,1, CS0, DS0, CD0" AS #1:’open serial port

)

... Insert Example Programs Here

999 END

1000 ’- synchronize on acknowledge & handle error:

1010 INPUT#1,ACK

1020 IF (ACK=0) THEN GOTO 1110

1030 IF (ACK<0) OR (ACK>4) THEN GOTO 1100

1040 PRINT "ERROR: ";ACK;

1050 ON ACK GOTO 1060,1070,1080,1090

1060 PRINT "SYNTAX ERROR"

1070 PRINT "EXECUTION ERROR"

: END

1080 PRINT "SYNCHRONISATION ERROR" : END

1090 PRINT "COMMUNICATION ERROR"

1100 PRINT "UNKNOWN ACKNOWLEDGE"

1110 RETURN

: END

First the serial port of the PC is opened (line 10) with the settings of the

oscilloscope communication parameters ^**)

Following that, the example program lines from the COMMAND REFERENCE

SECTION can be executed.

The subroutine to synchronize on the <acknowledge> returned from the

oscilloscope starts at line 1000.

) The oscilloscope communication parameters are stored in battery backup

memory when the oscilloscope is turned off. On power-up the parameters are

restored.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 4

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6.3 COMMANDS IN FUNCTIONAL ORDER

group

name

command

Communication

Program Communication

Setup

Auto Setup

Default Setup

Program Setup

Program text

Query Setup

Query text

Recall Setup

Save Setup

Calibrate

States

Go to Local

Go to Remote

Local Lockout

Measurement

Arm Trigger

Program Wavefrom

Query measurement

Query Wavefrom

Trigger Acquisition

Query Print

Miscellaneous

IDentification

Reset Instrument

STatus query

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 5

6.4 COMMANDS IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER

command

name

Auto Setup

Arm Trigger

Calibrate

Default Setup

Go to Local

Go to Remote

IDentification

Local Lockout

Program Communication

Program Setup

Program text

Program Wavefrom

Query Setup

Query measurement

Query Print

Query text

Query Wavefrom

Reset Instrument

Recall Setup (internal)

Save Setup (internal)

STatus query

Trigger Acquisition

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 6

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6.5 COMMAND REFERENCE

In this section all commands of the CPL protocol available in the oscilloscope are

described in alphabetical order.

All command descriptions have the same layout:

NAME

Purpose:

Explains the command, its parameters and limitations.

Command:

Shows the syntax for the programming command. The parameters are separated

by one or more PROGRAM DATA SEPARATORS <pds>. Commands are

terminated by a Carriage Return (CR).

Response:

Shows the format of the response coming from the oscilloscope. Responses are

terminated by a Carriage Return (CR).

The oscilloscope will <acknowledge> after the receipt of each programmed

command. This acknowledgment indicates the status of the oscilloscope after

command execution. For more information refer to section 6.6 (ACKNOWLEDGE).

To obtain a more detailed status description, the status can be fetched with the

ST command.

Example:

Example lines of programming code are used to demonstrate the function of the

CPL commands. The examples as shown can be embedded in the Program

Frame mentioned in section 6.2.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 7

AUTOSET

Purpose:

To start the AUTOSET function. With this command the oscilloscope will select

the optimum settings (volts, time base, trigger mode, etc.) for the connected

signal(s).

The AutoSet (AS) command performs the same function as pressing the front

panel AUTOSET button.

Command:

"AS"

Response:

acknowledge

Note:

The <acknowledge> will be sent after the AUTOSET has been fully

completed.

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"AS" :’Send command

110 GOSUB 1000

:’Sync on acknowledge

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 8

THE CPL PROTOCOL

ARM TRIGGER

Purpose:

Will reset the timebase and rearm the triggering for a new timebase trigger.

Issuing this command during a time base sweep will immediately stop the sweep,

reset the timebase and rearm the triggering.

The Arm Trigger (AT) command performs the same function as pressing the

frontpanel SINGLE-ARM’D button.

Command:

"AT"

Response:

acknowledge

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"AT" :’Send command

110 GOSUB 1000 :’Sync on acknowledge

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 9

CALIBRATE

Purpose:

To start the internal Auto-Calibration procedure. This procedure optimizes the

input, trigger and time base circuitry of the oscilloscope. This calibration takes

approximately one minute and completion is signalled by the acknowledge.

The Calibrate (CL) command performs the same function as pressing the front

panel CAL button for more than 2 seconds.

Command:

"CL"

Response:

acknowledge

Note:

The <acknowledge> will be sent after the calibration has been fully

completed. A detailed error report may be queried for using the ST

command (only if acknowledge is not zero).

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"CL" :’Send command

110 GOSUB 1000

:’Sync on acknowledge

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 10

THE CPL PROTOCOL

DEFAULT SETUP

Purpose:

Sets the oscilloscope to the default setup conditions.

The Default Setup (DS) command performs the same function as pressing the

TEXT OFF and STATUS/LOCAL buttons simultaneously.

The communication interface parameters will not be changed.

Command:

"DS"

Response:

acknowledge

Note:

The <acknowledge> is sent after the completion of the change to the

default setups.

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"DS" :’Send command

110 GOSUB 1000

:’Sync on acknowledge

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 11

GO to LOCAL

Purpose:

Puts the oscilloscope in the Local State. In the Local State, all oscilloscope

functions are accessible via the front panel buttons and knobs.

The Go to Local (GL) command performs the same function as pressing the

STATUS/LOCAL key on the front panel of the oscilloscope, when the oscilloscope

is in the Remote State (Refer also to "Go to Remote" and "Local Lockout").

Command:

"GL"

Response:

acknowledge

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"GL" :’Send command

110 GOSUB 1000

:’Sync on acknowledge

Local, Remote, Remote+Local Lockout States

power-on

"Go to Remote"

Local State

Remote State

"Go to Local"

"Reset Instrument"

"Local Lockout"

Remote with

Local Lockout

State

"Go to Local"

"Reset Instrument"

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 12

THE CPL PROTOCOL

GO to REMOTE

Purpose:

Puts the oscilloscope in the Remote State. In the Remote State none of the

oscilloscope functions are accessible via the front panel buttons and knobs.

Going back to the Local State is achieved by sending the Go to Local (GL)

command or by pressing the STATUS/LOCAL key on the frontpanel (Refer also

to "Local Lockout" and "Go to Local").

Command:

"GR"

Response:

acknowledge

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"GR" :’Send command

110 INPUT #1,ACK

:’Sync on acknowledge

Local, Remote, Remote+Local Lockout States

power-on

"Go to Remote"

Local State

Remote State

"Go to Local"

"Reset Instrument"

"Local Lockout"

Remote with

Local Lockout

State

"Go to Local"

"Reset Instrument"

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 13

IDENTIFICATION

Purpose:

Returns the identification of the oscilloscope. It gives information about the model

number, the version numbers of all software modules and the installed options.

This Identification (ID) command gives the same information as can be read from

the oscilloscope screen after pressing the frontpanel knob UTILITY and the

softkey MAINTENANCE.

Command:

"ID"

Response 1:

acknowledge

Response 2:

identity string

Note:

The items in the identity string are separated by a ’;’(ASCII 59)

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"ID" :’Send command

110 GOSUB 1000

120 INPUT #1,ID$

130 PRINT ID$

:’Sync on acknowledge

:’Input Identity string

:’Print Identity string

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 14

THE CPL PROTOCOL

example response:

FLUKE;PM 3380B;0;SW3394BI V4.0 1996-10-02;UHM V1.0;UFO V2.0;IEEE;EMCR

1 - manufacturer

2 - model number of the oscilloscope

3 - information about the oscilloscope software

4 - information about the micro-controller software

5 - information about the frontpanel control software

6 - information about installed options, e.g.:

• IEEE (IEEE interface)

• EXT (External Trigger option; only in 4 channel models)

• EM (Extended Memory)

• MP (Math Plus)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 15

LOCAL LOCKOUT

Purpose:

This instruction will inhibit the Go to Local function of the STATUS/LOCAL key on

the frontpanel.

Once activated, the Local Lockout State is disabled by sending the Go to Local

(GL), the Reset Instrument (RI) command or by cycling power OFF and ON.

(Refer also to "Go to Remote" and "Go to Local").

There is no front panel equivalent for this command.

Command:

"LL"

Response:

acknowledge

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"LL" :’Send Command

110 GOSUB 1000

:’Sync on acknowledge

Local, Remote, Remote+Local Lockout States

power-on

"Go to Remote"

Local State

Remote State

"Go to Local"

"Reset Instrument"

"Local Lockout"

Remote with

Local Lockout

State

"Go to Local"

"Reset Instrument"

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 16

THE CPL PROTOCOL

PROGRAM COMMUNICATION

Purpose:

To program baudrate, parity mode, number of data and stopbits and the

handshake method for computer communication.

After the command is sent, an <acknowledge> will be returned with the old

communication parameters still active.

If the <acknowledge> = 0, the new communication parameters will be valid

approximately 0.5 seconds later. The communication parameters are stored in

battery backup memory and restored on power-up.

This command performs the same function as the UTILITY + RS232 SETUP menu.

Command:

"PC"

pds

baud

pds

parity

pds

data bits

to bypass handshake

pds

stop bits

pds

handshake

<baud>

75, 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,

38400

O, E or N

7 or 8

XONXOFF to enable Xon/Xoff handshake

HWL

to enable hardwareline handshake

If left out, both handshake methods are disabled.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

Response:

6 - 17

acknowledge

Note:

approx. 0.5 sec after an <acknowledge> = 0 is received, the

communication parameters are changed to the new values.

Example:

100 PAR$="2400,N,8,1"

110 CTL$=",XONXOFF"

120 PRINT #1,"PC",PAR$,CTL$

130 GOSUB 1000

:’comm parameters

:’XONXOFF handshake

:’Send command

:’Sync on acknowledge

:’Close the COM Port,

140 CLOSE #1

150 WT=TIMER

160 WHILE (TIMER-WT) < .5 : WEND :’Wait 0.5 second

170 COMM$ = "COM1:"+PAR$+",CS0,DS0,CD0"

180 OPEN COMM$ AS #1

:’Reprogram COM Port

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 18

THE CPL PROTOCOL

PROGRAM SETUP

Purpose:

To configure the oscilloscope using compact setup strings.

This Program Setup (PS) command and the Query Setup (QS) command can be

used together to restore and retrieve a complete setup or partial of the

oscilloscope.

The format of the programming strings must be the same as the format of the

received setup strings. Each setup string describes a "node" in the oscilloscope

setup.

It is possible to send back partial setups because the setup nodes can be send

individually.

(Refer to "Query Setup" and section 6.8 SETUP)

Command:

"PS"

pds

count

pds

node

send more nodes

<count>

<node>

number of node strings to follow.

string of hexadecimal characters (0..9,A..F) representing a

setup node in the oscilloscope.

Response:

acknowledge

Note:

The <acknowledge> is sent after the setup has been completed.

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"PS";

110 PRINT #1,N;

120 FOR I=1 TO N

:’Setup command

:’# of strings

130 PRINT #1," ";SETUP$[I]; :’Send strings sep’d by SP **)

140 NEXT I

150 PRINT #1,""

160 GOSUB 1000

:’Send CR to end the setup

:’Sync on acknowledge

**) These are the strings that are received after a Query Setup (QS) command

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 19

PROGRAM TEXT

Purpose:

To program text to an oscilloscope.

If the S parameter is specified, setup text is programmed. The text will be set into

one of the setup registers of the oscilloscope. The parameter n specifies the setup

text field is set to ’spaces’.

If the S parameter is not specified, user text is programmed. The text will be

displayed on the screen of the oscilloscope. A maximum number of 64 characters

is allowed. The remainder of the text field is set to ’spaces’. The parameter n may

not be used.

The programmed text can be read with the Query Text (QT) command.

Command 1:

"PT"

pds

"S"

pds

Response 1:

acknowledge

Command 2:

char

Response 2:

acknowledge

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 20

THE CPL PROTOCOL

"S"

setup text will be specified for register n; if "S" and n are left out,

user text is specified

one of the setup registers, ranging from 0 to 10;

n=0 selects the current setup

char a character byte; range = 0 to 12, 14 to 255

(refer to character code table 6.1)

The following table contains the decimal codes of the character set for the screen

of an oscilloscope:

CHAR

CHARACTER DESCRIPTION

0 .. 12

15 and 16

17 and 18

Control up/down character (conform char. 127)

Command terminator ASCII CR (may not be used)

Control up/down character (conform char. 127)

Positive and negative slope characters

Positive and negative pulse characters

Dual slope character

Special marker (X)

21, 22, 23

24 and 25

26 and 27

28 and 29

Delta, degrees, micro characters

Low impedance (low_z) and omega (Ohm) characters

Arrow up and down (char. 27 is also ESC character)

AC and ground (channel coupling) characters

Filled o character

ASCII space character

33 .. 35

ASCII characters ! " #

External Trigger char character E_T

ASCII characters % & ’

37 .. 39

40 .. 47

48 .. 57

58 .. 64

65 .. 77

78 .. 90

91 .. 95

ASCII characters ( ) + , - . /

ASCII characters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ASCII characters : ; < = > ? @

ASCII characters A B C D E F G H I J K L M

ASCII characters N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

ASCII characters [ \ ] ^ _

Menu selection indication

97 .. 109

110 .. 122

123

ASCII characters a b c d e f g h i j k l m

ASCII characters n o p q r s t u v w x y z

Menu return indication

124

| character

125 and 126

127

Menu rocker key up and down characters

Control up/down character (

)

128 .. 255

Control up/down character (conform char. 127)

Table 6.1 Character code table for oscilloscopes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 21

Examples: (of user text)

1) Program the following user text to be displayed on the screen of the

oscilloscope: Measurement 15

100 PRINT #1,"PT"

110 GOSUB 1000

:’Program user Text command

:’Sync on acknowledge

120 PRINT #1,"Measurement 15":’Send user text

130 GOSUB 1000 :’Sync on acknowledge

2) In the next example user text, containing non-keyboard characters (Ω=25

decimal and s =125 decimal), is programmed to be displayed on the screen

of the oscilloscope, e.g.: Ohm(Ω),Up(s).

100 PRINT #1,"PT"

110 GOSUB 1000

:’Program user Text command

:’Sync on acknowledge

120 PRINT #1,"Ohm(";CHR$(25);"),Up(";CHR$(125);")."

:’Send user text

130 GOSUB 1000

:’Sync on acknowledge

Example: (of setup text)

Program the following text to set up register 7 of the oscilloscope:

1.25 kΩ (CH1)

100 PRINT #1,"SS 7"

110 GOSUB 1000

120 PRINT #1,"PT S 7"

130 GOSUB 1000

:’Save Setup command

:’Sync on acknowledge

:’Program setup Text command

:’Sync on acknowledge

140 PRINT #1,"1.25 k";CHR$(25);" (CH1)"

:’Send setup text

:’Sync on acknowledge

150 GOSUB 1000

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 22

THE CPL PROTOCOL

PROGRAM WAVEFORM

Purpose:

To send a waveform to the oscilloscope. This function is referred to as toProgram

a complete Waveform in the oscilloscope.

A waveform is sent (programmed) in two command sequences. The first

sequence selects the waveform register number, programs the waveform

administration data, and programs the number of samples. The second sequence

programs the samples, including a checksum. Each sequence is synchronized by

an acknowledge response.

You can use the PW command to send the data received with the QW command

back to the oscilloscope.

Note:

The number of data bits of the RS-232 interface must be 8 (not 7),

otherwise, an execution error will occur.

Command 1:

"PW"

pds

wave_nr

pds

admin

pds

count

Response 1:

acknowledge

Command 2:

sample

checksum

Response 2:

acknowledge

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 23

wave_nr

The oscilloscope waveform destination:

011 - 084 for m1.1 - m8.4 01e - 08e for m1.e - m8.e

091 - 504 for m9.1 - m50.4 (Extended Memory only)

09e - 50e for m9.e - m50.e (Extended Memory only)

(xx.e for 2 ch. models only; xx.3 and xx.4 for 4 ch. models only)

16 parameters, separated by a "pds":

ACTION BY

admin

PARAMETER

TYPE

EXAMPLE

OSCILLOSCOPENOTES

trace_name

Y_unit

X_unit

Y_zero

X_zero

Y_resolution

X_resolution

Y_range

date

time

dT-corr

min/max

mult_shot_tot

mult_shot_nr

reserved

string

number

string

m4.1

-8.625E-6

78.13E-3

1E-6

65535

25-01-1994

17:10:25:40

375E-3

ignored

interpreted

ignored

interpreted

ignored

interpreted

ignored

string

number

string

ignored

Notes:

1) dT = dT-corr X-resolution

2) 1 = min/max trace envelopes 0 = waveform trace

3) date format: European = E25-01-1994

American = A01-25-1994

Japanees = J1994-01-25

for compatibility reasons (initial versions)

European format without leading character can

be used.

4) for compatibility reasons (initial versions) hundreds of

seconds can be omited

count

The number of samples in the waveform:

512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192, 16384 or 32768

(Extended Memory: 2048 and higher)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 24

THE CPL PROTOCOL

sample

2 bytes (Most Significant Byte + Least Significant Byte), representing

the 16 bit sample value (bit 16 = -32768, bit 15 = 16384, ..., bit 1 = 1).

Range: -32k (down) to +32k (up)

Example: 1000000011000111 = value -32569

byte 1

byte 2

byte 1 = 128 (value -32768)

byte 2 = 128+64+4+2+1 = 199 (value +199)

checksum 1 byte checksum of all sample bytes

(add one by one; result modulus 256)

Example:

In this example, a waveform of 512 points is generated in the computer and sent to

the oscilloscope. The display of the waveform on the oscilloscope screen consists

of two sine waves (amplitude = ± 3 vertical divisions and period (2π) = 5 horizontal

divisions). The Y-scale will be set at 500 Volts per division, and the X-scale at

50.0 µs per division. The following values can be calculated from these settings:

The number of waveform amplitude points = 3 divisions * 6400 points/div. = 19200

(used in the example program)

The number of waveform time points = trace length (512) / 2 2π) = 40.744

(used in the example program)

500 V/div.

<Y_resolution> =

<X_resolution> =

= 78.13E-3V

= 1E-6s

6400 dots/div.

50 µ/div.

50 dots/div.

After running the example program, perform the following:

„

Select the default setup by pressing the front panel keys STATUS and TEXT

OFF at the same time.

„

Select the digital mode by pressing the ANALOG key.

Select the recall menu by pressing the RECALL key.

Use the TRACK button and the software keys to turn the m4 register display

on and the acq display off.

„

Press the STATUS key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 25

Example program:

100 COUNT=512

:’Number of samples

110 PRINT "Generating trace samples ..." :’Display operator message

120 DIM WAVE(2*COUNT)

130 FOR I=1 TO COUNT

:’Declare waveform array

:’For all samples

140

150

160

170

180

SAMPLE = INT(19200*SIN(I/40.744))

LSB = SAMPLE AND &HFF

MSB = ((SAMPLE-LSB) / 256) AND &HFF :’Calculate Most Sign. Byte

WAVE(2*I) = LSB

WAVE(2*I-1) = MSB

:’Generate sine value

:’Calculate Least Sign. Byte

:’Put LSB in array

:’Put MSB in array

190 NEXT

200 PRINT "Transmitting trace administration ..."

:’Display operator message

210 PRINT #1,"PW",41,

220 PRINT #1,"m4.1",

230 PRINT #1,"V",

240 PRINT #1,"s",

250 PRINT #1,+3,

260 PRINT #1,-8.625E-6,

270 PRINT #1,78.13E-3,

280 PRINT #1,1E-6,

290 PRINT #1,65535,

300 PRINT #1,"E25-01-1994",

310 PRINT #1,"14:32:56:00",

320 PRINT #1,375E-3,

330 PRINT #1,0,

:’Program waveform (m4.1)

:’Trace_name (ignored)

:’Y_unit (Volts)

:’X_unit (seconds)

:’Y_zero (3 V offset)

:’X_zero (ignored)

:’Y_resolution

:’X_resolution

:’Y_range (ignored)

:’Date

:’Time

:’Delta T correction

:’Min Max trace off

:’Mult_shot_tot

340 PRINT #1,32,

350 PRINT #1,5,

:’Mult_shot_nr

360 PRINT #1,"0","0",

:’Reserved field 1,2

(ignored)

370 PRINT #1,COUNT

380 GOSUB 1000

:’Number of 16 bit samples

:’Sync on acknowledge

390 SUM=0

400 PRINT "Transmitting trace samples ..."

:’Display operator message

:’2 bytes per sample

410 FOR I=1 TO 2*COUNT

420

430

PRINT #1,CHR$(WAVE(I));

SUM=(SUM+WAVE(I))MOD(256)

:’Send each sample byte

:’Calculate checksum

440 NEXT I

450 PRINT #1,CHR$(SUM);

460 GOSUB 1000

:’Send checksum

:’Sync on acknowledge

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 26

THE CPL PROTOCOL

QUERY MEASUREMENT

Purpose:

To obtain measurement data from an oscilloscope.

If the V (Value) parameter is specified, one measured value will be returned.

If the L (Logging) parameter is specified, an infinite number of measured values

will be returned. Cancelling is possible by sending the ASCII character ESC.

If no V or L parameter is specified, one measured value is returned, preceded by

its type, and concluded by its suffix.

Note:

If averaging is on, the values will be averaged over the number of

average counts.

Command:

"L"

"V"

"QM"

"V"

"L"

only the numerical value of the measurement result is returned

the numerical values of an infinite number of measurement

results is returned; cancelling is possible by sending ASCII

character ESC (= 27 decimal)

decimal number, specifying the type of measurement to perform

(see table on next page)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 27

meas_type ¹⁾

suffix_unit ¹⁾

Note:

variable

Vdc

variable

measurement 1

measurement 2

delta Voltage between cursors

Volt cursor 1

Volt cursor 2

Volt dc

delta Time between cursors ²⁾

Frequency (1/dT)

delta X ³⁾

dPh

Phase difference

T1-trg

T2-trg

FFT_freq

FFT_ampl

Time between cursor 1 and trigger

Time between cursor 2 and trigger

Frequency at cursor ⁴⁾

dB/dBm/

dBµV/Vrms

Amplitude at cursor ⁴⁾

Notes: 1) The meas_type and suffix_unit of the measurement 1 and 2 values

depend on the selections, made with the MEASURE MENU via the

front-panel key MEASURE. Refer to the MEASURE MENU of

chapter 5 "FUNCTION REFERENCE".

2) Delta T can only be obtained, if X-Deflection is off.

3) Delta X can only be obtained, if X-Deflection is on.

4) FFT only when MATH+ option is availlable.

Response 1:

acknowledge

Response 2:

","

meas_value

meas_type

","

meas_value

","

suffix_unit

Response 2:

Condition:

No V or L parameter

V parameter specified

L parameter specified

type,value,unit

value

value{,value}

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 28

THE CPL PROTOCOL

meas_type

meas_value

suffix_unit

string of characters, specifying the type of the measured value,

e.g. "Tr"

string of characters, specifying the measured value in floating

point notation, e.g. "98934E-09"

string of characters, specifying the unit of the measured value:

"V", "s" or "Hz"

Example: (of a single measurement)

100 PRINT #1,"QM",21

:’Query for frequency

measurement

110 GOSUB 1000

:’Sync on acknowledge

120 INPUT #1,TYPE$,MEAS$,SUFFIX$ :’Read measured frequency

130 PRINT "Measurement: ";TYPE$;MEAS$;SUFFIX$

:’Print measured frequency

Example: (of multiple measurements)

100 PRINT #1,"QM",10,"L"

:’Query for delta-

voltage measurement

:’Sync on acknowledge

:’Read measured

110 GOSUB 1000

120 INPUT #1,MEAS$

delta-voltage

130 PRINT "Measurement

:";MEAS$:’Print measured

delta-voltage

140 IF INKEY$="" THEN GOTO 120 :’Do next measurement

until a key is pressed

150 PRINT #1,CHR$(27)

:’Send ESC character

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 29

QUERY PRINT

Purpose:

To obtain the graphical data of the display from the oscilloscope.

The Query Print (QP) command can be used to retrieve a complete display

picture, which can be stored as a HPGL file in the PC. This file can then be used

in for example FLUKEVIEW, Word Perfect or Word files.

Command:

"QP"

Response 1:

acknowledge

null

Response 2:

print data

print data HPGL data bytes.

In the example below the print data is read byte after byte by the PC

and appended to the HPGL.HGL file

null

When input buffer stays empty data transfer has ended

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 30

THE CPL PROTOCOL

Example: Written in Quick Basic;

CLS

OPEN “COM2:19200,N,8,1, CS0, DS0, CD0” FOR RANDOM AS #1

OPEN “HPGL.HGL” FOR OUTPUT AS #2 : ‘Open output file

PRINT #1, “QP”; 1

Start! = TIMER

: ‘Query print

WHILE ((TIMER < Start! + 1) AND (LOC(1) = 0))

WEND

IF LOC(1) > 0 THEN

PRINT “Response = “;

: ‘Sync on data

Byte$ = INPUT$(LOC(1),#1)

PRINT Byte$;

:’Read each data byte

:’Display databyte

PRINT #2, Byte$;

Start! = TIMER

:’Append databyte to file

WHILE ((TIMER < Start! + 1) AND (LOC(1) = 0))

WEND

LOOP WHILE LOC(1) > 0

ELSE

PRINT “No Response”

END IF

: ‘Error message

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 31

QUERY SETUP

Purpose:

To query the oscilloscope for its current setup.

This Query Setup (QS) command and the Program Setup (PS) command can be

used together in order to retrieve and restore a complete or partical setup of the

oscilloscope. Optionally a parameter can be added to the command to query a

particular part of the setup. When this parameter is omitted, the complete setup

is returned.

The response can be stored as an array of strings in the computer to be sent back

later using the PS command. Each string that is received describes a setup node

in the oscilloscope.

(Refer to Program Setup (PS) and section 6.8 SETUP)

Command:

bypass to ask all nodes

"QS"

pds

node number

<node number> optional parameter, in decimal ASCII, to query only one

setup node. Refer to section 6.8 SETUP for the setup node

numbers.

Response 1:

acknowledge

Response 2:

count

","

node

more nodes to follow

<count>

<node>

number of strings to follow

string of decimal characters representing a setup node in

the oscilloscope, e.g. 16 (=10 hex.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 32

THE CPL PROTOCOL

Example:

(Complete setup query)

90 DIM SETUP$[25]

100 PRINT #1,"QS"

110 GOSUB 1000

:’Reserve space

:’Send command

:’Sync on acknowledge

120 INPUT #1,N

:’Read number of node strings

130 FOR I=1 TO N

140 INPUT #1,SETUP$[I]

150 PRINT "N= ";I;SETUP$[I]

160 NEXT I

:’Read all node strings

example response:

(PM3394)

11,0106hlhl.....,0206hlhl......,0306hlhl......CR

)

^**) These SETUP$ array elements can be stored and sent back later to the

oscilloscope with the "PS" command.

(Optional setup query to read only one setup node)

100 PRINT #1,"QS";4

110 GOSUB 1000

120 INPUT #1,N

130 INPUT #1,SETUP$

140 PRINT SETUP$

:’Query setup node 4

:’Sync on acknowledge

:’Read number of setup nodes

:’Read the setup node

:’Print the setup string

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 33

QUERY TEXT

Purpose:

To query text from an oscilloscope.

If the S parameter is specified, setup text is returned. The text will be queried from

one of the setup registers of the oscilloscope. The parameter n specifies the setup

If the S parameter is not specified, user text is returned. The text will be queried

from the screen of the oscilloscope. A text field of 64 characters is returned. The

parameter n may not be used.

The queried text can be programmed again with the Program Text (PT) command.

Command:

"QT"

pds

"S"

pds

"S"

setup text of register n will be returned; if "S" and n are left out,

user text is returned

one of the setup registers, ranging from 0 to 10;

n=0 selects the current setup

Response 1:

acknowledge

Response 2:

char

char a character byte; range = 15 to 127

(refer to PROGRAM TEXT character code table 6.1)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 34

THE CPL PROTOCOL

Example: (of user text)

Read the user text from the screen of an oscilloscope:

90 DIM USERTXT$ (64)

100 PRINT #1,"QT"

110 GOSUB 1000

:’Query user Text command

:’Sync on acknowledge

120 LINE INPUT #1,USERTXT$ :’Read text characters

130 PRINT USERTXT$ :’Print user text

The text on the screen of the oscilloscope will be printed, e.g.:

Measurement 15

Note:

The ASCII presentation of the oscilloscope character set is

printed, e.g. :

• dec 25 = oscilloscope character Ω

• dec 25 = ASCII character ↓

Example: (of setup text)

Read the text from setup register 7 of an oscilloscope:

90 DIM SETUP$ (22)

100 PRINT #1,"QT S 7"

110 GOSUB 1000

120 LINE INPUT #1,SETUP$

130 PRINT SETUP$

:’Query setup Text command

:’Sync on acknowledge

:’Read text characters

:’Print setup text

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 35

QUERY WAVEFORM

Purpose:

To obtain a complete waveform from the oscilloscope.

You can use the PW command to send the data received with the QW query back

to the oscilloscope.

The option ",A" can be used to recall the date and time in the customized format.

When compatibility with initial versions of these oscilloscopes is required this ",A"

option should be omitted.

Note:

The number of data bits of the RS-232 interface must be 8 (not 7);

otherwise an execution error will be given.

Command:

"QW"

pds

wave_nr

",A"

Response 1:

acknowledge

Response 2:

admin

","

count

","

sample

checksum

Note:

A trace transfer can be canceled by sending the ESC character

(= 27 decimal).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 36

THE CPL PROTOCOL

wave_nr

The oscilloscope waveform source:

001 - 004 for CH1 - CH4

011 - 084 for m1.1 - m8.4

00e for EXT TRIG

01e-08e for m1.e - m8.e

091 - 504 for m9.1 - m50.4 (Extended Memory only)

09e - 50e for m9.e - m50.e (Extended Memory only)

(xx.e for 2 ch. versions only; xx3 and xx4 for 4 ch. versions only)

admin

16 parameters, separated by a ",":

PARAMETER

TYPE

EXAMPLE NOTES

trace_name

Y_unit

X_unit

string

m4.1

Y_zero

X_zero

Y_resolution

X_resolution

Y_range

date

number

string

Y-position (reverse)

Trigger delay

-8.625E-6

78.13E-3

1E-6

65535

[F]1994-01-25

time

string

17:11:25:40 no",A" option: 17:11:25

dT-corr

number

string

375E-3

dT = dT-corr * X-resolution

1 = min/max trace

min/max

mult_shot_tot

mult_shot_nr

reserved

string

1) When ’A’ option is added; F = date format

(E = European, A = American, J = Japanese)

No option then E format.

count

The acquisition length: 512, 8192, 16384 or 32768

(Extended Memory: 8192 and higher)

sample

2 bytes (Most Significant Byte + Least Significant Byte), representing

the 16-bit sample value (bit 16 = -32768, bit 15 = 16384, ..., bit 1 = 1).

Range: -32k (down) ... +32k (up)

Example: 1000000011000111 = value -32569

byte 1

byte 2

byte 1 = 128 (value -32768)

byte 2 = 128+64+4+2+1 = 199 (value +199)

checksum 1 byte checksum over all sample bytes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 37

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"QW";74

110 GOSUB 1000

120 INPUT #1,NM$

:’Query waveform (m7.4)

:’Sync on acknowledge

:’Trace_name

130 INPUT #1,YUNIT$

140 INPUT #1,XUNIT$

150 INPUT #1,YZERO

160 INPUT #1,XZERO

170 INPUT #1,YRESOL

180 INPUT #1,XRESOL

190 INPUT #1,YRANGE

200 INPUT #1,DT$

:’Y_unit

:’X_unit

:’Y_zero

:’X_zero

:’Y_resolution

:’X_resolution

:’Y_range

:’Date

210 INPUT #1,TM$

:’Time

220 INPUT #1,DTC

:’Delta T correction

:’Min Max trace

:’Reserved field

:’Sample_count

:’Declare waveform array

230 INPUT #1,MINMAX

240 INPUT #1,RES1$

250 INPUT #1,RES2$

260 INPUT #1,RES3$

270 INPUT #1,RES4$

280 INPUT #1,COUNT

290 DIM WAVE(2*COUNT)

300 SUM=0

310 PRINT "Reading trace samples ..."

320 FOR I=1 TO 2*COUNT

:’Display operator message

:’2 bytes per sample

330

340

WAVE(I)=ASC(INPUT$(1,#1))

SUM=(SUM+WAVE(I))MOD(256)

:’Read each sample byte

:’Calculate checksum

350 NEXT I

360 CHECKSUM=ASC(INPUT$(1,#1))

370 IF SUM <> CHECKSUM THEN GOTO 380

380 END

:’Read checksum

:’Test checksum

390 PRINT "*** Checksum error ***"

:’Display error message

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 38

THE CPL PROTOCOL

Interpretation of waveform data

As a response to the QW command the oscilloscope sends a set of data describing

the waveform. The following example shows the interpretation of that data. The

example assumes the Probe Adjust signal to be applied to input channel 1.

For information about MATHPLUS, refer to the supplement for the operation guide.

EXAMPLE:

Settings

Attenuator

Coupling

Offset

Time base

Delay

200 mV/div

-1.5 div = -300 mV offset.

200 us/div

-2.50 div = 500 us pre-trigger view

Display

1−

CH1 200mV

MTB 200µs −2.5dv

ch1

ST6994

SYMBOL

PARAMETER

VALUE

TYPE

Data

Y-unit

string

X-unit

string

Y-zero

X-zero

0.3

-0.0005

number

Y-resolution

X-resolution

Y-range

dT-correction

sample count

sample 1

sample 2

. . . . .

3.125e-005 number

4e-006

65535

4688E-04

512

9603

9612

number

binary

. . . .

Yrng

dT-corr

Y[1]

Y[2]

. . . .

Y[N]

. . . . .

-9599

sample N

binary

The following definitions and formula’s that enable you to interpret the data above.

The same definitions, symbols and formula’s will be used to describe the discrete

mathematical functions of the MATH+ processing functions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 39

Definitions

A waveform can be described as a set of two one dimensional arrays: S[1...N]

and T[1...N]. The index n corresponds with the number of the samples and is an

integer value in the range 1...N. The waveform of a sampled signal describes for

a range of sample moments (T[1]...T[N]; usually expressed in seconds) the value

of the signal at these moments (S[1]...S[N]; usually expressed in volts).

A waveform is sometimes expressed in other units. An FFT waveform for example

gives for a range; of frequencies (T[1]...T[N]; expressed in Hz) the signal

amplitude of these frequency components (S[1]...S[N]; expressed in dB). Another

example is the possibility to multiply an input voltage with a floating point value of

another dimension.

Formula’s

S[n]

S[n] is the value of sample n, expressed in Y-units.

Y-units are usually expressed in volts.

S[n] = (Yz + (Y[n] Yr)) Yu

Sensitivity Usually the sensitivity is expressed in volt/div. In the oscilloscope,

the range of the Y[n] values (Yrng) always equals 2^16 = 65535,

which corresponds with 10.24 divisions on the screen. This gives a

maximum vertical resolution of 6400 ’levels’ per division.

Sensitivity is expressed in Y-units/division.

^{Sensitivity = 6400}* ^Yr* ^Yu/div

Offset

Offset is the vertical screen position of the signal ground level,

indicated by "1-" (excluding Y-pos shift). The offset can be adjusted

with the front panel Y POS controls. For calculated traces the offset

can be adjusted with the delta-controls in the MATHematics menu.

Offset is expressed in Y-units (volts).

Offset = -Yz Yu

Note:

Traces can also be positioned with the Y-pos control in the

RECALL menu, but this does not affect the offset. The

reason is that Y-pos is a pure display function, which

therefore does not affect the signal sampling, nor the

calculation of a trace using a mathematics function.

T[n]

T[n] is the sample moment, expressed in X-units.

X-units are usually expressed in seconds.

T[n] = (Xz + (n-1) Xr) + (dT-corr Xr)) Xu

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 40

THE CPL PROTOCOL

Time base In case of a sampled signal the horizontal scale is called the time

base. The time base setting is usually expressed in

seconds/division. Without magnification or compression the

oscilloscope always displays 50 samples per horizontal division.

Note:

The horizontal scale as well as the FFT scale can differ. In

that case it is expressed in X-units per division.

^{Time base = 50}* ^Xr* ^Xu/div

Delay

Delay is the time delay between the trigger moment and the

moment that the first sample is taken. If the delay is negative, the

first sample is taken before the trigger moment. This is called pre-

trigger view. In case of pre-trigger view the trigger point (horizontal

position of which T[n]=0) is indicated on the screen. The delay or

the position of the trigger point can be adjusted by means of the

TRIGGER POSITION control.

Delay is usually expressed in X-units (seconds).

Note:

Traces can also be positioned in horizontal direction with

the X- POS control, but this does not affect the delay. The

reason is that X-POS is a pure display function and

therefore does not affect the signal sampling.

Delay = -(Xz + (dT-corr Xr)) Xu

Trigger pos = (Xz + (dT-corr Xr)) Xu

These values can also be expressed in divisions :

Delay = ( -(Xz + (dT-corr Xr)) / Xr ) 1/50 div

Trigger pos = ( (Xz +(dT-corr Xr)) / Xr ) 1/50 div

Notes:

• ^{The mathematic functions only give useful results, if there is no conflict}

between the units. For example, it makes no sense to add amperes to volts.

• ^{The trigger delay and the time base setting of the two traces must be equal.}

This is always guaranteed, if the traces were acquired at the same time,

because the trace elements are from the same register.

• ^{Consider the following useful example of a mathematics function:}

Perform the multiplication of two traces with different units, i.e. a trace

representing volts over time and a trace with amperes over time.

The resulting trace is expressed in watts and gives the power over time.

After integration this gives the Pulse Power in joules.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 41

RESET INSTRUMENT

Purpose:

Resets all of the software of the oscilloscope, including the CPL protocol handler

and all of the input and output buffers.

Oscilloscope settings remain the same. Interface parameters are not changed in

order to keep the communication alive.

When the Reset has been completed the oscilloscope responds with an

<acknowledge>.

There is no frontpanel equivalent for this command.

Command:

"RI"

Response:

acknowledge

Note:

<acknowledge> will be sent after the Reset has been completed

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"RI" :’Send command

110 GOSUB 1000

:’Sync on acknowledge

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 42

THE CPL PROTOCOL

RECALL SETUP

Purpose:

To recall an internally stored setup from one of 10 setup registers. This setup must

have been stored in the oscilloscope manually or with the Save Setup (SS)

command.

The command performs the same as the frontpanel key SETUPS together with

the softkey RECALL.

Command:

"RS"

pds

setup reg

represents the setup register number ranging from 1...10

Response:

acknowledge

Note:

<acknowledge> will be sent after the internal setup has been completed.

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"RS";5 :’Recall setting 5

110 GOSUB 1000

:’Sync on acknowledge

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 43

SAVE SETUP

Purpose:

To save the current oscilloscope setup in one of 10 internal setup registers. This

setup can be recalled manually or by sending the Recall Setup (RS) command.

The command performs the same as the frontpanel key SETUPS together with

the softkey SAVE. An execution error will be returned if the setup register is write

protected.

Command:

"SS"

pds

setup reg

represents the setup register number, ranging from 1 ... 10

Response:

acknowledge

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"SS";3 :’Save setup in reg 3

110 INPUT#1,ACK : Sync on acknowledge

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 44

THE CPL PROTOCOL

STATUS

Purpose:

To obtain a more detailed status report. The response gives more information

about the conditions, causing a wrong acknowledge.

The status is returned as one or more signed decimal integers.

Each bit of the equivalent 16-bit binary status word represents a status condition.

If a bit is set, the corresponding status event has occurred.

The 16-th (sign) bit of a status word indicates that another status word follows.

The last status word is the error status.

After the reply, the value of the status is reset to zero. The complete description

of the status word can be found in section 6.7 (STATUS).

The function of the front panel key STATUS has no relation with this ST command.

Command:

"ST"

Response:

acknowledge

when acknowledge=0 followed by:

status

","

<status> = signed integer,

between -32768 ... 32767

) when status is negative

)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 45

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"ST"

110 GOSUB 1000

120 INPUT #1,STATUS

:’Send command

:’Sync on acknowledge

:’Read Status word

130 IF STATUS < 0 THEN GOTO 120 :’Fetch next status

140 GOSUB 2000

:’Display Status )

example status:

6CR (= 0000000000000110 in binary)

which means: (because bit 2 and bit 1 are set)

data out of range and

data format of the body is wrong

) See section 6.7 (STATUS) for program example.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 46

THE CPL PROTOCOL

TRIGGER ACQUISITION

Purpose:

To perform a software trigger.

This command causes an acquisition or sweep to be started. It is the software

equivalent of a normal trigger pulse. In the single shot mode the AT (Arm Trigger)

command is sent to arm the triggering first.

Command:

"TA"

Response:

acknowledge

Example:

100 PRINT #1,"TA" :’Send Trigger Acquisition

110 GOSUB 1000 :’Sync on acknowledge

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 47

6.6 ACKNOWLEDGE

The <acknowledge> is a synchronization reply that is returned after each

command sent to the oscilloscope, signalling correct or incorrect operation:

"0"

"1"

"2"

"3"

"4"

Ok, normal situation

Syntax error

Execution error

Synchronization error

Communication error

(ST query may give more info)

Explanation and examples of the errors:

Syntax Error:

returned when the command is not understood by the oscilloscope for one of the

following reasons:

Unknown header, wrong instructions

Data format of body is wrong, e.g. alpha characters when decimal data

expected

Execution Error:

returned when internal processing is not possible:

Data out of (internal) range

Conflicting oscilloscope settings

Synchronization Error:

returned when the oscilloscope receives a new command while it is still executing

the previous one:

a new command is sent without waiting for the <acknowledge>

synchronization.

Communication Error:

returned when any framing, parity or overrun error occurs in the received data.

When an error is detected during the execution of the command:

--the oscilloscope sends an <acknowledge>,

--the oscilloscope terminates further execution of the command and returns

to the idle state,

--the oscilloscope is then ready for a new command.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 48

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6.7 STATUS

The Status word gives more information when the acknowledge is non- zero. A

certain bit in the word can be found by performing a logical AND of the status word

with the mask defined below.

(Logical AND: the words are compared bitwise and only when both bits are 1, the

result bit is 1)

Example:

Status = 38 and must be checked for ’data out of range’ (4)

0000 0000 0010 0110

0000 0000 0000 0100

logical AND

First status word: CPL status

Bit

Mask

Value

dec

Meaning

Position hex

&H0001

Unknown header

Data format of body is wrong

Data out of range

&H0002

&H0004

&H0008

&H0010

&H0020

&H0040

&H0080

&H0100

&H0200

&H0400

&H0800

&H1000

&H2000

&H4000

&H8000

Invalid instruction

-- reserved, normally zero

Invalid number of parameters

Wrong number of databits

Flash ROM not present

Invalid Flash software

Conflicting oscilloscope settings

User request, front panel key pressed

Flash write error

-- reserved, normally zero

Invalid password entered

-- reserved, normally zero

Next status available

128

256

512

1024

2048

4096

8192

16384

32768

Second status word: Auto calibration status

Third status word: Acquisition status

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 49

Example program to investigate status:

2000 PRINT "STATUS IS: ";STATUS

2010 PRINT "MEANING: ";

2020 IF (STATUS AND &H0001) > 0 THEN PRINT "UNKNOWN HEADER"

2030 IF (STATUS AND &H0002) > 0 THEN PRINT "WRONG DATA FORMAT"

2040 IF (STATUS AND &H0004) > 0 THEN PRINT "DATA OUT OF RANGE"

2050 IF (STATUS AND &H0020) > 0 THEN PRINT "INVALID # PARAMS"

2060 IF (STATUS AND &H0040) > 0 THEN PRINT "WRONG # DATABITS"

2070 IF (STATUS AND &H0200) > 0 THEN PRINT "CONFLICT SETTING"

2080 IF (STATUS AND &H0400) > 0 THEN PRINT "USER REQUEST"

2090 IF ABS (STATUS AND &H8000) > 0 THEN PRINT "MORE STATUS"

2100 RETURN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 50

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6.8 SETUP

The Query Setup (QS) and Program Setup (PS) commands can be used together

in order to retrieve and restore a complete or partical setup of the oscilloscope.

When a setup is requested from the oscilloscope, it will send its setup as a

sequence of strings. Each separate string describes a setup node. By adding a

parameter to the QS command a particular setup node can be queried.

So the query program could be:

PRINT #1,"QS"

Complete setup

PRINT #1,"QS",2 Only node 2 (channel 2 settings)

PRINT #1,"QS",S Only node S, where S must be one of the

values specified below.

Node numbers (S) can have the following values:

hex

dec

meaning

Channel 1 settings

Channel 2 settings

Not used

Ext trig settings

(nodes above: attenuator, display on/off, coupling DC/AC, GND,

Invert, 50Ω/1 MΩ, continuous(var)/discrete, position control)

Probe Scale settings (scale value, scale unit)

Common vertical settings

(add 1+2, alt/chop, bandwidth limiter on/off, number of traces,

average, envelope).

Common horizontal settings

(X-deflection on/off, mode auto/trig/single/multiple, X-deflection

source, magnify, acquisition length, X-position.

Main Timebase settings

(timebase speed, triggering edge/TV, MTBI on/off, MAIN TB on/off,

trigger slope pos/neg, TV trigger F1/F2/line, noise suppression

on/off, continuous(var)/discrete, level-pp on/off, trigger source,

trigger coupling, TV trigger normal/hdtv)

Delayed Timebase settings

(timebase speed, trigger mode edge/tv, DEL’D TB on/off, edge

trigger slope pos/neg, edge trigger source, trigger coupling)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE CPL PROTOCOL

6 - 51

hex

dec

meaning

Events Trigger Delay settings

(event counter low/high, trigger level low/high, trigger source, event

bits, trigger coupling)

SCPI Trigger Settings (SCPI trigger source low/high)

Cursor settings

(V cursors on/off, T cursors on/off, rise time on/off, control V/T, Vpp

on/off, rise time 10-90/20-80, readout Vpp/V+V-, cursors on/off, V

readout delta/absolute/ratio, T readout delta/1/delta/ratio, channel

FFT read out dBm/dBµV/Vrms, FFT reference impedance)

Cursor autosearch settings

(on/off, flank selection, reference selection, abs/rel)

Measurement 1 settings

Measurement 2 settings

(Measure bits, measure type, source 1 low/high, source 2 low/high)

Pass/fail test settings

(on/off, define, action, menu on/off, hardware on/off)

Mathematics 1 settings

Mathematics 2 settings

(Mathematics bits, mathematics type, source 1 low/high, source 2

low/high, scale low/high, scale minimum low/high, offset low/high,

window width low/high)

Display settings

(settings display on/off, ground level indicator on/off, trigger level

indicator on/off, dots join on/off, x versus Y on/off, status view

on/off, backup status view, window on/off))

Trace intensity settings

(analog trace intensity low/high, mtb/dtb intensity ratio)

Display trace position setting (X position, Y position)

Setup label text (max 22 characters)

Real time clock setting (format)

112

240

Special node for service purposes

It is NOT necessary to send all strings to the oscilloscope, when a setting must

be changed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 - 52

THE CPL PROTOCOL

Applications: The setup nodes for different timebase settings can be stored

separately. They can be used afterwards as fixed ’templates’ to

change only the oscilloscope timebase setup.

The layout of each setup node string is:

nnllxxxxxx.......xx

where all characters are in the hexadecimal range (0..9,A..F).

Each pair forms the hexa-decimal representation of a byte, in high-low order

(eg. hex:2A = bin:00101010 = dec:42)

nn the setup node number

the number of bytes in the setup node

(each byte is represented by two characters)

xx the actual setup node

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ACQUIRE MENU STRUCTURE

A - 1

Appendix A

ACQUIRE menu structure

DIGITAL MODE:

ACQUIRE

TRACK

AVERAGE

256

PEAK DET

on off

ENVELOPE

on off

ST6565

9312

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B - 1

CURSORS menu structure

Appendix B

CURSORS menu structure

ANALOG

DIGITAL

ANALOG

CURSORS

on off

ch2

ch3

ch4

ch2

ch3

ch4

ch2

ch3

ch4

CONTROL

READOUT

CURSORS

READOUT

CURSORS

READOUT

CURSORS

READOUT

∆T 1/∆T

∆T-ratio

∆T 1/∆T

∆T-ratio

ph T-trg

∆T=100%

∆T=360°

∆V

V1&V2

∆V-ratio

V1&V2

∆V-ratio

∆V=100%

cursor

track

yes no

cursor

track

yes no

CONTROL

RETURN

ST6567.1

9312

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CURSORS menu structure

B - 2

CURSORS

on off

ch2

ch3

ch4

ch2

ch3

ch4

ch2

ch3

ch4

select

∆ cursor

trace

select

∆ cursor

trace

CONTROL

READOUT

CURSORS

READOUT

CURSORS

READOUT

CURSORS

READOUT

∆T 1/∆T

∆T-ratio

∆T 1/∆T

∆T-ratio

∆T

∆T-ratio

1/∆T

T-trg

ph T-trg

T-trg

∆T=100%

∆T=360°

∆T=100%

∆V

V1&V2

∆V-ratio

V1&V2

∆V-ratio

V1&V2

∆V-ratio

∆V=100%

cursor

track

yes no

cursor

track

yes no

CONTROL

RETURN

ST6567.2

9312

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DISPLAY MENU STRUCTURE

C - 1

Appendix C

DISPLAY menu structured

ANALOG MODE:

DISPLAY

X-DEFL

on off

X-SOURCE

ch1

ANALOG

X-DEFL

TEXT

ch2

ch3

ch4

line

RETURN

TRACK

USE:

for Position

∆

for Character

DIGITAL MODE:

DISPLAY

EDIT

USER

TEXT

X vs Y

TEXT

TRIG IND

on off

TRACK

acq

WINDOWS

GND IND

on off

space

on off

TRACK

VERT

USER

TEXT

MAGNIFY

off

X SOURCE

m3.1

delete

insert

X vs Y

m3.2

m3.3

TEXT

dots

lineair

sine

RETURN

ENTER

ST6560

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D - 1

MATHEMATICS MENU STRUCTURE

Appendix D

MATHEMATICS menu structure

MATH

MATH n

MATH 1

m1=

MATH 2

m2=

filter

acq

add

sub

mul

filter

ch1

ch2

on off

TRACK

SCALE

PARAM

ch1

∆

DISPLAY

SOURCE

yes no

DISPLAY

SOURCE

yes no

ch2

∆

MATH 1

MATH 2

ENTER

MATH

FILTER

PARAM

SCALE

TRACK

1 DIV=

21.3mU

WINDOW

samples

∆

OFFSET

26.8mU

∆

auto-

scale

RETURN

ST6748

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MEASURE MENU STRUCTURE

E - 1

Appendix E

MEASURE menu structure

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

F - 1

DTB (DEL’D TB) menu structure

Appendix F

DTB (DEL’D TB) menu structure

(TB MODE)

EVENTS

DELAY

OFF

DTB

DELAYED

TIMEBASE

DELAYED

TIMEBASE

(TRIGGER)

OFF

DELAY TB

on off

DELAY TB

on off

MAIN TB

on off

MAIN TB

on off

starts

trig’d

TRACK

TRACE

SEP

LEVEL

TRACE

SEP

∆

125mV

ac dc

lf-rej

hf-rej

ST6564

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAVE/RECALL MENU STRUCTURE

G - 1

Appendix G

SAVE/RECALL menu structure

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

H - 1

SETUPS MENU STRUCTURE

Appendix H

SETUPS menu structure

SETUPS

CLEAR&

CLEAR

SETUPS

CONFIRM

FRONT

PROTECT

SETUPS

CONFIRM

TRACK

std

PROTECT

recall

undo

save

on off

yes

clear

OVERRULE

PROTECT?

ARE YOU

SURE ?

clear

all

TEXT

CLEAR&

PROTECT

RETURN

TRACK

USE:

for Position

SETUP

TEXT

EDIT

∆

USE:

for Character

space

delete

insert

ENTER

ST6746

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TB MODE MENU STRUCTURE

J - 1

Appendix J

TB MODE menu structure

ANALOG:

TB MODE

EVENT

DELAY

EVENT

DELAY

on off

auto

trig

single

TRACK

COUNT

1022

CHANNEL

2 E3XT4

∆

ANALOG

∆

LEVEL

+99.8mV

alt chop

RETURN

DIGITAL :

TB MODE

ACQ

LENGTH

CONFIRM

TB MODE

ACQ

LENGTH

4ch @

auto

trig

512 pts

single

4ch @

2k pts

multi

ROLL

on off

2ch @

4k pts

ROLL

on off

yes

REALTIME

ONLY

STOP ON

TRIGGER

yes no

1ch @

8k pts

ARE YOU

SURE ?

yes no

EVENT

DELAY

ACQ

LENGTH

ACQ

LENGTH

RETURN

1) OPTIONAL

ST6563

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

K - 1

TRIGGER menu structure

Appendix K

TRIGGER menu structure

ANALOG MODE:

TRIGGER

MAIN TB

TRIGGER

MAIN TB

edge tv

field 1

field 2

lines

field 1

field 2

ch3

line

lines

TRACK

level-pp

on off

LINE NBR

ANALOG

noise

on off

pos neg

ac dc

lf-rej

hf-rej

VIDEO

SYSTEM

hdtv

VIDEO

SYSTEM

hdtv

DIGITAL MODE:

TRIGGER

MAIN TB

TRIGGER

MAIN TB

TRIGGER

MAIN TB

edge tv

logic

state

pattern

glitch

logic

field 1

field 2

lines

ch3

line

TRACK

level-pp

on off

LINE NBR

LH↑H

CLOCK

ch1

noise

on off

ch2

ch3

pos neg

ch4

ac dc

lf-rej

hf-rej

VIDEO

SYSTEM

hdtv

ST6566.1

9303

only in SINGLE mode, when ’REAL TIME ONLY’

in TB MODE menu is yes.

level-pp is then replaced by:

trigger gap

0.50 div T

TRACK

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRIGGER menu structure

K - 2

VIDEO

SYSTEM

hdtv

ntsc

pal

secam

LINES

1050

1125

1250

ENTER

TRIGGER

MAIN TB

TRIGGER

MAIN TB

TRIGGER

MAIN TB

edge tv

logic

state

pattern

glitch

edge tv

logic

state

pattern

glitch

edge tv

logic

state

pattern

glitch

LHxH

enter

exit

if >t1

if <t2

range

RANGE

enter

exit

if >t1

if <t2

range

>t1

<t2

range

TRACK

RANGE

x.xxxms

xx.xxms

t1 =

x.xxxms

∆

x.xxxms

xx.xxms

∆

ST6566.2

9303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

L - 1

UTILITY menu structure

Appendix L

UTILITY menu structure

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UTILITY menu structure

L - 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

M - 1

VERTICAL MENU STRUCTURE

Appendix M

VERTICAL menu structure

VERT MENU

VERTICAL

BW LIMIT

on off

50Ω CH1

on off

50Ω CH2

on off

50Ω CH3

on off

50Ω CH4

on off

ST7412

9312

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RS-232 CABLE CONFIGURATIONS

N - 1

Appendix N

RS-232 Cable configurations

This appendix supplies additional information about the RS-232 cable

configurations between the oscilloscope and a connected device. The

oscilloscope and most of the devices are Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)

configurated.

Communication lines:

TxD

RxD

RTS

CTS

DTR

DSR

DCD

Transmitted Data

Received Data

Request To Send

Clear To Send

Data Terminal Ready

Data Set Ready (= Modem Ready)

Data Carrier Detect

S.GND = Signal ground

F.GND Safety ground

A. Cable to printer/plotter/controller with software handshake

parameters: "3-wire/7-wire" = 3-wire

"XON-XOFF on off" = on

OSCILLOSCOPE

DEVICE

(DTE)

SIGNAL

9 PIN

(female)

9 PIN

25 PIN

TxD

RxD

RfR

CTS

DTR

DSR

DCD

S.GND

F.GND

CASE

ST6930

ATTENTION: The maximum Baud rate for the PM8277 and PM8278 plotters is

4800 baud. For a higher Baud rate you must use a hardware

handshake configuration.

NOTE:

The LQ1500 printer can have a 6-pole DIN connector with the

following connections:

TxD on pin 1

RxD on pin 3

DTR on pin 2

S.GND on pin 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

N - 2

RS-232 CABLE CONFIGURATIONS

B. Cable to printer/plotter with hardware handshake

parameters: "3-wire/7-wire" = 7-wire

"XON-XOFF on off" = on or off

OSCILLOSCOPE

(DTE)

PRINTER/PLOTTER

(DTE)

9 PIN

SIGNAL

9 PIN

(female)

25 PIN

(male)

TxD

RxD

RfR

CTS

DTR

DSR

DCD

S.GND

F.GND

CASE

ST6921

C. Cable to controller with hardware handshake

parameters: "3-wire/7-wire" = 7-wire

"XON-XOFF on off" = on or off

The communication is confirm the RfR protocol. This means that signal RfR is

active when the oscilloscope can receive data.

OSCILLOSCOPE

(DTE)

CONTROLLER

(DTE)

SIGNAL

9 PIN

(female)

9 PIN

(female)

25 PIN

(female)

TxD

RxD

RfR

CTS

DTR

DSR

DCD

S.GND

F.GND

CASE

ST6920

NOTE: When during data transfer the signal DSR on the oscilloscope becomes

inactive, the serial communication buffers of the instrument are cleared.

The hard copy action or waveform transfer stops then.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX P

P - 1

Appendix P

CHANNELS SIMULTANEOUSLY SAMPLED AT 100 MS/s

The scope has two 8-bit flash analog-to-digital converters (ADCs), each with a

maximum sample rate of 100 MS/s. This allows two channels to be captured

simultaneously in single shot mode, with sample rates of up to 100 MS/s for each

channel. The horizontal resolution is then 10 ns (i.e., 1/100 MS/s).

DOUBLE SAMPLING MODE FOR 200 MS/s SINGLE CHANNEL ACQUISITIONS

Input stage switching expands the capability of both ADCs so they can be

interleaved, allowing a maximum sample rate of 200 MS/s on a single channel.

The entire acquisition memory can be used so that the record length for a single

channel acquisition is can be equal to the full memory of the instrument (i.e., 8K

for the standard instrument, and 32 K for an instrument equipped with Memory

Expansion). The interleaving is done by feeding the input signal of a single

channel to both ADCs that are sampling at a phase difference of 5 ns.

GLITCH DETECTION

The sampling rate of a DSO decreases when you lower the timebase setting. As

long as the glitch capture feature is activated, the ADCs continue to sample at

their maximum speed. A fast digital circuit analyzes all of these samples at real-

time speed (100-MHz signal processing).

Only the maximum and minimum values (i.e., an envelope of min/max pairs) are

stored in memory. Such a glitch detection circuit allows very narrow glitches to be

captured even at low timebase settings and even if they occur only once.

The glitch capture circuit can also be used to avoid aliasing. The upper curve and

the lower curve of an AM modulated signal appear on screen as an envelope of

min/max pairs, and the area in between is shaded.

In the two-channel mode, glitches down to 10 ns (i.e., 1/100 Ms) can be captured.

In single-channel mode, even glitches down to down to 5 ns can be captured.

GLITCH CAPTURE IN FOUR CHANNEL MODE

If more than two channels are activated and the glitch detector is switched on, the

scope automatically selects the alternating mode. Since the alternate mode

allows each ADC to run at full speed, 10 ns glitch detection is now possible on all

four channels.

Single-shot acquisition with glitch detection is possible only in one- and two-

channel modes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P - 2

APPENDIX P

CHANNEL ACQUISITIONS

For three- or four-channel acquisition, the ADCs are used in conjunction with the

chopped mode or alternate mode.

In the chopped mode the first ADC takes a single sample on channel 1, then one

on channel 3, then one on channel 1 again and so on. The second ADC chops

between channels 2 and 4. The chopping rate is so high that the effective sample

rate is 5 MS/s on four channels in parallel. This is more than adequate for single

shot capture in most applications (power switching, audio, process control, etc.)

and certainly for electro/mechanical applications, which are typically in the kHz

range.

The advantage of a high speed chopper is that it allows single shot acquisitions

to be taken on four channels simultaneously. The chopper is also an advantage

for acquisitions at low timebase speeds.

ALTERNATING ACQUISITION

Some applications require the use of an alternating signal acquisition mode. In

this mode each ADC can be used to its highest speed. Channels are acquired in

the following sequence :

Channels 1 and 2 are acquired in parallel, with synchronized ADC acquisition,

followed by channels 3 and 4. Because each ADC can be used up to 100 MS/s,

glitch capture is now possible for glitches down to 10 ns.

RANDOM SAMPLING FOR FULL 200 MHz ACQUISITIONS AT HIGH TIME/DIV

AND FOR FOUR CHANNELS IN PARALLEL.

For high timebase settings (200 ns/div to 2 ns/div), real-time signal acquisition

would require a real-time sampling rate of 25 GigaSamples/second. Such sample

rate is not achievable.

The oscilloscope can be used with time base speeds exceeding the capabilities

of the ADCs. For such acquisitions repetitive signals are required. A sampling

method known as random sampling is used.

This sampling method is automatically selected at higher time base speeds. In the

random sampling mode, the chopper is used to acquire four signals

simultaneously without restriction. The glitch detection circuit is not needed at

these high timebase speeds because the sample distance is smaller than the

glitch capture capability of 10 ns would allow (40 picoseconds at 2 ns/div).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX P

P - 3

EXPANSION AND INTERPOLATION

Sometimes there is a need to look at a single shot or low repetition rate signal at

high timebase speed. This can be done by selecting the ‘real time sampling only’

mode in the Main Time Base menu. In this mode the scope never switches to

random sampling.

In order to capture a longer time ‘window’ than would be accessible with the given

time base speed, the Main Time Base mode menu allows you to select a longer

acquisition length.

By means of horizontal magnification (2x, 4x, 8x, up to 32x) you can expand the

signal, giving you a higher effective time base speed. In the DOTS mode, single

samples become visible, and SINE and LINEAR interpolation can be used to

reconstruct a true-to-life waveform. In four channel single shot mode with its

maximum sample rate of 5 MS/s, a timebase speed close to 1 µs/div is no

problem. The 8x magnified waveform is then reconstructed out of 62 samples.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION INDEX

I - 1

FUNCTION INDEX (see Chapter 5)

ACQUISITION LENGTH

ADD INVERT SUBTRACT

ADD (MATHEMATICS)

ALT/CHOP

ANALOG MODE

AUTO RANGE

AUTOSET

AUTOSET RECALL SEQUENCE

AUTOSET USERPROG

AVERAGE

BANDWITH LIMITER

CALIBRATION AUTOCAL

CHANNEL TRACE SELECTION

CONFIDENCE CHECK

CURSORS

CURSORS READOUT

DELAY

DELAY MEASUREMENT

DEL’D TB

DIGITAL MODE

DISPLAY MENU

ENVELOPE

EXTERNAL TRIGGER

FILTER

GLITCH TRIGGER

HOLD OFF

INPUT ATTENUATOR

INPUT COUPLING

INPUT IMPEDANCE

LOGIC TRIGGER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I - 2

FUNCTION INDEX

MAGNIFY HORIZONTAL

MAGNIFY VERTICAL

MAIN TB TIME/DIV

MATHEMATICS

MEASURE MENU

MULTIPLY

PEAK DETECTION

POSITION

POWER SUPPLY

PRINTING AND PLOTTING

PROBE UTILITIES

REMOTE CONTROL

RUN/STOP

SCREEN CONTROLS AND GRATICULE

SCREEN MESSAGES

SETUPS

SETUPS RECALL SEQUENCE

STANDARD FRONT/FRONT PANEL RESET

STATUS SCREEN

SUBTRACT (MATHEMATICS)

TB MODE

TEXT OFF

TIME MEASUREMENTS

TOUCH,HOLD & MEASURE MODE

TRIGGER COUPLING

TRIGGER DEL’D TB

TRIGGER LEVEL

TRIGGER MAIN TB

TV TRIGGER

USERTEXT

UTILITY MENU

UTILITY SCREEN & SOUND

UTILITY MAINTENANCE

VOLT MEASUREMENTS

X-DEFLECTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION INDEX

I - 3

INDEX

The overall index contains all function names and reference words in alphabetical

order. It refers to the relevant section and page number, mainly of Chapter 5

(Function Reference). In this chapter more detailed information can be found.

Entry

Refer to chapter/function

Page

50Ω

1 MΩ

INPUT IMPEDANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

a.c.

INPUT COUPLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

TRIGGER COUPLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79

ACQUISITION LENGTH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

CHANNEL/TRACE SELECTION . . . . . . . . 5-17

ADD INVERT SUBTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

ADD (MATHEMATICS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

PRINTING AND PLOTTING. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

ALT/CHOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Acquisition

Add

Adjusting the clock

Alternate

Analog

4.3 ANALOG AND DIGITAL MODES . . . . . . . . . 4-9

ANALOG MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

INPUT ATTENUATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

CALIBRATION AUTOCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

AUTO RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

INPUT ATTENUATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

AUTO RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

MAIN TIMEBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

AUTO RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Attenuator

Autocal

Automatic attenuators

Automatic timebase

Auto range

Autoset

4.16 AUTOSET AND SETUP UTILITIES . . . . . . 4-70

AUTOSET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

AUTOSET SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

AUTOSET USERPROG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

AVERAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Average

Bandwidth

Bar graph

BANDWIDTH LIMITER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

CURSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Calibration

Channel

Characteristics

Checking

Chop

CALIBRATION AUTOCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

CHANNEL/TRACE SELECTION . . . . . . . . 5-17

Reference manual

CONFIDENCE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

ALT/CHOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I - 4

FUNCTION INDEX

Page

Entry

Refer to chapter/function

Clock

PRINTING AND PLOTTING. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

TOUCH, HOLD & MEASURE ™ MODE . . 5-78

ADD INVERT SUBTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

CONFIDENCE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Command switch

Common mode

Confidence

Cursor limited

measurements

MEASURE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

TIME MEASUREMENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76

VOLT MEASUREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XI

CURSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

CURSORS READOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Connections

Cursors

d.c.

INPUT COUPLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

VOLT MEASUREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91

DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

DELAY MEASUREMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

DC voltage

Delay

Delay measurement

Delayed timebase

4.14 DELAYED TIMEBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

DELAYED TIMEBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

TRIGGER DEL’D TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

ADD INVERT SUBTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Differential mode

Digital mode

4.3 ANALOG AND DIGITAL MODES. . . . . . . . . 4-9

DIGITAL MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Display

4.2 DISPLAY AND PROBE ADJUSTMENT . . . 4-06

4.13 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

DISPLAY MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

TRIGGER MAIN TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

PRINTING AND PLOTTING. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

TIME MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76

Dual slope trigger

dump-m1

Duty cycle

Envelope

Event delay

Expansion

ENVELOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

ACQUISITION LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

APPENDIX N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1

EXTERNAL TRIGGER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

External trigger

Fall time

Filter

TIME MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76

FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

TIME MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

Frequency

Front

4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

STANDARD FRONT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION INDEX

Entry

I - 5

Refer to chapter/function

Page

Glitch

PEAK DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

GLITCH TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

INPUT COUPLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Glitch trigger

GND

Hard copy

PRINTING AND PLOTTING. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

VOLT MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

HOLD OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

High level

Hold off

Horizontal deflection

Horizontal functions

4.5 HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION. . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

4.8 ADVANCED HORIZONTAL FUNCTIONS . 4-34

IEEE 488.2

PRINTING AND PLOTTING. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

REMOTE CONTROL IEEE 488.2. . . . . . . . 5-58

INPUT ATTENUATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

INPUT COUPLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

INPUT IMPEDANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

DISPLAY MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. . . . . . . . . 2-1

APPENDIX N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N-1

ADD INVERT SUBTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Input attenuator

Input coupling

Input impedance

Interpolation

Installation

Invert

Logic trigger

Low level

LOGIC TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

VOLT MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

Magnify

MAGNIFY HORIZONTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

MAGNIFY VERTICAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

UTIL MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

HOLD OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

MAIN TIMEBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Maintenance

Main Timebase

Mathematics

4.12 PROCESSING FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

MATHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

VOLT MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

Maximum voltage

Measure

4.11 MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . 4-49

DELAY MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

MEASURE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

TIME MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

VOLT MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I - 6

FUNCTION INDEX

Page

Entry

Refer to chapter/function

Memory

Memory back-up

Memory bar

Memory expansion

Minimum voltage

Multiply

4.9 MEMORY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

2.2 MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERIES . . . . . . . . 2-3

CURSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

ACQUISITION LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

VOLT MEASUREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

MULTIPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Overshoot

VOLT MEASUREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

Peak detection

Performance test

Period

PEAK DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Reference manual

TIME MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76

VOLT MEASUREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

Pkpk voltage

Plot

4.15 HARD COPY FACILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

PRINTING AND PLOTTING. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

CONFIDENCE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

VOLT MEASUREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Post-trigger

Power up check

Preshoot

Pre-trigger

4.15 HARD COPY FACILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

PRINTING AND PLOTTING. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

PROBE UTILITIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

UTILITY MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89

TIME MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76

Probe

Pulse width

Random sampling

TIMEBASE MODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

APPENDIX N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1

CURSOR READOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

PRINTING AND PLOTTING. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

CHANNEL/TRACE SELECTION . . . . . . . . 5-17

SETUPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67

TIME MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76

VOLT MEASUREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

PRINTING AND PLOTTING. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

REMOTE CONTROL RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

RUN/STOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

APPENDIX N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1

Readout

Real time clock

Recall

Rise time

RMS voltage

RS-232

Run

RS-232 cables

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION INDEX

Entry

I - 7

Refer to chapter/function

Page

Safety

Sampling

OPERATORS SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

TIMEBASE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

APPENDIX N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N-1

SETUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67

SCREEN CONTROLS AND GRATICULE . 5-62

SCREEN MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

UTILITY SCREEN & SOUND. . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

PRINTING AND PLOTTING. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

Save

Screen

Setting the clock

Setups

4.16 AUTOSET AND SETUP UTILITIES . . . . . . 4-70

SETUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66

SETUPS SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68

TIMEBASE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

UTILITY SCREEN & SOUND. . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

TIME MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77

VOLT MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

ADD INVERT SUBTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

SUBTRACT (MATHEMATICS) . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

Single shot

Sound

Statistics

Status

Subtract

Text

DISPLAY MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

TEXT OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

USER TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

TIMEBASE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

DELAYED TIMEBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

CURSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

CURSORS READOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

MEASURE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

TIME MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77

CURSORS READOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Timebase

Time cursors

Time measurements

Time to trigger

Touch, Hold & Measure 4.11 TOUCH, HOLD & MEASURE MODE . . . 4-52

TOUCH, HOLD & MEASURE MODE . . . 5-78

CHANNEL/TRACE SELECTION . . . . . . . . 5-17

DELAYED TIMEBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

TRIGGER COUPLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79

TRIGGER DEL’D TB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

TRIGGER LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

TRIGGER MAIN TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

EXTERNAL TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

CURSORS READOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

TV TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Trace

Trace separation

Trigger

Trigger position

Trigger View

T-trg

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I - 8

FUNCTION INDEX

User text

USER TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87

Vertical deflection

Vertical functions

Vertical magnify

Volt cursors

4.4 VERTICAL DEFLECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

4.7 ADVANCED VERTICAL FUNCTIONS . . . . 4-29

DISPLAY MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

CURSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

CURSORS READOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

MEASURE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

VOLT MEASUREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91

Volt measurements

Waveform parameters

Windows

CPL PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

DISPLAY MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

X-Deflection

DISPLAY MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

X-DEFLECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

DISPLAY MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

X-DEFLECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

X vs Y

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Estate Marine Radio 9782188A User Manual
Exmark Lawn Mower 4500 368 User Manual
FoodSaver Food Saver v825 User Manual
Fostex Headphones HP P1 User Manual
Fujitsu Automobile Accessories V5505 User Manual
Fujitsu Scanner FI 5000N User Manual
Fusion Car Speaker MR FR6520 User Manual
GBC Laminator Catena 35 User Manual
GE Oven SCA 2000 User Manual
Global Machinery Company Sander PBSM User Manual